Table of Contents
- Printer overview
- Paper trays
- Supplies, accessories, and parts
- Order supplies, accessories, and parts
- Dynamic security
- Configure the HP toner-cartridge-protection supply settings
- Introduction
- Enable or disable the Cartridge Policy feature
- Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Policy feature
- Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
- Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Policy feature
- Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
- Troubleshoot Cartridge Policy control panel error messages
- Enable or disable the Cartridge Protection feature
- Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Protection feature
- Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Protection feature
- Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Protection feature
- Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Protection feature
- Troubleshoot Cartridge Protection control panel error messages
- Replace the toner cartridges
- Replace the imaging drums
- Replace the toner-collection unit
- Replace the staple cartridge (M776zs model only)
- Copy
- Scan
- Set up Scan to Email
- Set up Scan to Network Folder
- Introduction
- Before you begin
- Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
- Step two: Set up Scan to Network Folder
- Method one: Use the Scan to Network Folder Wizard
- Method two: Use Scan to Network Folder Setup
- Step one: Begin the configuration
- Step two: Configure the Scan to Network Folder settings
- Step one: Begin the configuration
- Dialog one: Set the Quick Set name, description, and options for user interaction at the control pan ...
- Dialog two: Folder Settings
- Dialog three: Notification Settings
- Dialog four: Scan Settings
- Dialog five: File Settings
- Dialog six: Summary
- Step three: Complete the configuration
- Set up Scan to SharePoint
- Set up Scan to USB Drive
- Scan to email
- Scan to job storage
- Scan to network folder
- Scan to SharePoint
- Scan to USB drive
- Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions
- Additional scan tasks
- Fax
- Manage the printer
- Solve problems
- Customer support
- Control panel help system
- Reset factory settings
- A “Cartridge is low” or “Cartridge is very low” message displays on the printer control panel
- Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds
- Clear paper jams
- Introduction
- Paper jam locations
- Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams
- Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
- Clear paper jams in the document feeder - 31.13.yz
- Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1)
- Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2)
- Clear paper jams in the fuser (13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF)
- Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1)
- Clear paper jams in the duplex area (13.D3)
- Clear paper jams in the 550-sheet trays (13.A3, 13.A4)
- Clear paper jams in the 2 x 550 paper trays (13.A4, 13.A5)
- Clear paper jams in the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5, 13.A7)
- Resolving color print quality problems
- Introduction
- Troubleshoot print quality
- Troubleshoot color quality
- Troubleshoot image defects
- Improve copy image quality
- Improve scan image quality
- Improve fax image quality
- Solve wired network problems
- Introduction
- Poor physical connection
- The computer is unable to communicate with the printer
- The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
- New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
- The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
- The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
- Solve wireless network problems
- Introduction
- Wireless connectivity checklist
- The printer does not print after the wireless configuration completes
- The printer does not print, and the computer has a third-party firewall installed
- The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or printer
- Cannot connect more computers to the wireless printer
- The wireless printer loses communication when connected to a VPN
- The network does not appear in the wireless networks list
- The wireless network is not functioning
- Reduce interference on a wireless network
- Solve fax problems
- Checklist for solving fax problems
- General fax problems
- The fax failed to send
- No fax address book button displays
- Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin
- The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled
- A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box
- A one-page fax prints as two pages
- A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing
- The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low
- Index
HP M776z User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for M776z by HP which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet
www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M776
User Guide
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise MFP M776
User Guide
Copyright and License
© Copyright 2019 HP Development Company,
L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without
prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to
change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be construed as
constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not
be liable for technical or editorial errors or
omissions contained herein.
Edition 1, 10/2019
Trademark Credits
Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop®, Acrobat®, and
PostScript® are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
macOS is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
AirPrint is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Google™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and
Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open
Group.
Table of contents
1 Printer overview ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1
Warning icons ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1
Potential shock hazard ............................................................................................................................................................ 2
Printer views .............................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Printer front view ................................................................................................................................................. 4
Printer back view .................................................................................................................................................. 5
Interface ports ...................................................................................................................................................... 6
Control-panel view ............................................................................................................................................... 7
How to use the touchscreen control panel ................................................................................. 8
Printer specications ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
Technical specications .................................................................................................................................... 10
Supported operating systems ......................................................................................................................... 12
Mobile printing solutions .................................................................................................................................. 14
Printer dimensions ............................................................................................................................................ 14
Power consumption, electrical specications, and acoustic emissions .................................................... 17
Operating-environment range ........................................................................................................................ 17
Printer hardware setup and software installation ............................................................................................................ 17
2 Paper trays .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................................. 19
Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) .......................................................................................................................... 21
Load Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) ..................................................................................................................... 21
Tray 1 paper orientation ................................................................................................................................... 22
Use alternative letterhead mode .................................................................................................................... 28
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus ............... 28
Load paper to Tray 2 ............................................................................................................................................................. 29
Load Tray 2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 29
Tray 2 paper orientation ................................................................................................................................... 31
Use alternative letterhead mode .................................................................................................................... 34
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus ............... 34
Load paper to the 550-sheet paper tray ........................................................................................................................... 35
Load paper to the 550-sheet paper tray ....................................................................................................... 35
ENWW iii
550-sheet paper tray paper orientation ....................................................................................................... 37
Use alternative letterhead mode .................................................................................................................... 41
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus ............... 41
Load paper to the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays ................................................................................................................... 42
Load paper to the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays ............................................................................................... 42
2 x 550-sheet paper tray paper orientation ................................................................................................. 44
Use alternative letterhead mode .................................................................................................................... 48
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus ............... 48
Load paper to the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays ................................................................................... 49
Load paper to the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays .............................................................. 49
2,700-sheet HCI paper tray paper orientation ............................................................................................. 50
Use alternative letterhead mode .................................................................................................................... 54
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus ............... 54
Load and print envelopes ..................................................................................................................................................... 55
Print envelopes .................................................................................................................................................. 55
Envelope orientation ......................................................................................................................................... 55
Load and print labels ............................................................................................................................................................. 57
Manually feed labels ......................................................................................................................................... 57
Label orientation ............................................................................................................................................... 57
3 Supplies, accessories, and parts .......................................................................................................................................................... 59
Order supplies, accessories, and parts ............................................................................................................................... 60
Ordering .............................................................................................................................................................. 60
Supplies and accessories ................................................................................................................................. 60
Maintenance/long-life consumables .............................................................................................................. 61
Customer self-repair parts ............................................................................................................................... 62
Dynamic security .................................................................................................................................................................... 63
Congure the HP toner-cartridge-protection supply settings ........................................................................................ 64
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 64
Enable or disable the Cartridge Policy feature ............................................................................................. 65
Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Policy feature ................................... 65
Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Policy feature .................................. 65
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Policy feature ............. 65
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Policy feature ............ 66
Troubleshoot Cartridge Policy control panel error messages ............................................... 66
Enable or disable the Cartridge Protection feature ...................................................................................... 68
Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Protection feature ........................... 68
Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Protection feature .......................... 68
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Protection feature ..... 69
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Protection feature .... 69
Troubleshoot Cartridge Protection control panel error messages ....................................... 70
iv ENWW
Replace the toner cartridges ................................................................................................................................................ 71
Toner-cartridge information ............................................................................................................................ 71
Remove and replace the cartridges ................................................................................................................ 72
Replace the imaging drums .................................................................................................................................................. 76
Imaging drum information ............................................................................................................................... 76
Remove and replace the imaging drums ....................................................................................................... 77
Replace the toner-collection unit ........................................................................................................................................ 81
Toner-collection unit information ................................................................................................................... 81
Remove and replace the toner-collection unit .............................................................................................. 81
Replace the staple cartridge (M776zs model only) .......................................................................................................... 85
Staple cartridge information ............................................................................................................................ 85
Remove and replace the staple cartridge ...................................................................................................... 85
4 Print .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 87
Print tasks (Windows) ............................................................................................................................................................ 88
How to print (Windows) .................................................................................................................................... 88
Automatically print on both sides (Windows) ............................................................................................... 88
Manually print on both sides (Windows) ........................................................................................................ 89
Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows) .................................................................................................... 89
Select the paper type (Windows) .................................................................................................................... 90
Additional print tasks ........................................................................................................................................ 91
Print tasks (macOS) ............................................................................................................................................................... 92
How to print (macOS) ........................................................................................................................................ 92
Automatically print on both sides (macOS) ................................................................................................... 92
Manually print on both sides (macOS) ........................................................................................................... 93
Print multiple pages per sheet (macOS) ........................................................................................................ 93
Select the paper type (macOS) ........................................................................................................................ 93
Additional print tasks ........................................................................................................................................ 94
Store print jobs on the printer to print later or print privately ........................................................................................ 95
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 95
Create a stored job (Windows) ......................................................................................................................... 95
Create a stored job (macOS) ............................................................................................................................ 96
Print a stored job ............................................................................................................................................... 97
Delete a stored job ............................................................................................................................................ 98
Delete a job that is stored on the printer .................................................................................. 98
Change the job storage limit ....................................................................................................... 98
Information sent to printer for Job Accounting purposes ........................................................................... 98
Mobile printing ........................................................................................................................................................................ 99
Introduction ........................................................................................................................................................ 99
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct Print, NFC, and BLE printing .......................................................................................... 100
Enable wireless printing ............................................................................................................ 100
ENWW v
Change the Wi-Fi Direct name .................................................................................................. 100
HP ePrint via email .......................................................................................................................................... 101
AirPrint .............................................................................................................................................................. 101
Android embedded printing .......................................................................................................................... 102
Print from a USB ash drive ............................................................................................................................................... 103
Enable the USB port for printing ................................................................................................................... 104
Method one: Enable the USB port from the printer control panel ...................................... 104
Method two: Enable the USB port from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-
connected printers only) ............................................................................................................ 104
Print USB documents ..................................................................................................................................... 104
Print using high-speed USB 2.0 port (wired) ................................................................................................................... 106
Method one: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the printer control panel menus ................. 106
Method two: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the HP Embedded Web Server
(network-connected printers only) ............................................................................................................... 106
5 Copy ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 107
Make a copy .......................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Copy on both sides (duplex) ............................................................................................................................................... 109
Additional copy tasks .......................................................................................................................................................... 111
6 Scan ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 113
Set up Scan to Email ............................................................................................................................................................ 114
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 114
Before you begin ............................................................................................................................................. 114
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ........................................................................... 114
Step two: Congure the Network Identication settings .......................................................................... 115
Step three: Congure the Send to Email feature ....................................................................................... 117
Method one: Basic conguration using the Email Setup Wizard ........................................ 117
Method two: Advanced conguration using the Email Setup .............................................. 120
Step four: Congure the Quick Sets (optional) ........................................................................................... 125
Step ve: Set up Send to Email to use Oice 365 Outlook (optional) ..................................................... 127
Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 127
Congure the outgoing email server (SMTP) to send an email from an Oice 365
Outlook account .......................................................................................................................... 127
Set up Scan to Network Folder .......................................................................................................................................... 129
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
Before you begin ............................................................................................................................................. 129
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ........................................................................... 129
Step two: Set up Scan to Network Folder .................................................................................................... 131
Method one: Use the Scan to Network Folder Wizard .......................................................... 131
Method two: Use Scan to Network Folder Setup ................................................................... 133
vi ENWW
Step one: Begin the conguration ....................................................................... 133
Step two: Congure the Scan to Network Folder settings .............................. 134
Step three: Complete the conguration ............................................................. 143
Set up Scan to SharePoint .................................................................................................................................................. 144
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
Before you begin ............................................................................................................................................. 144
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ........................................................................... 144
Step two: Enable Scan to SharePoint and create a Scan to SharePoint Quick Set ............................... 145
Scan a le directly to a SharePoint site ........................................................................................................ 146
Quick Set scan settings and options for Scan to SharePoint ................................................................... 148
Set up Scan to USB Drive .................................................................................................................................................... 150
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 150
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ........................................................................... 150
Step two: Enable Scan to USB Drive ............................................................................................................. 151
Step three: Congure the Quick Sets (optional) ......................................................................................... 151
Default scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup .................................................................................... 152
Default le settings for Save to USB setup ................................................................................................. 152
Scan to email ........................................................................................................................................................................ 154
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 154
Scan to email ................................................................................................................................................... 154
Scan to job storage .............................................................................................................................................................. 157
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 157
Scan to job storage on the printer ................................................................................................................ 157
Print from job storage on the printer ........................................................................................................... 159
Scan to network folder ....................................................................................................................................................... 160
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 160
Scan to network folder ................................................................................................................................... 160
Scan to SharePoint .............................................................................................................................................................. 163
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 163
Scan to SharePoint .......................................................................................................................................... 163
Scan to USB drive ................................................................................................................................................................. 165
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 165
Scan to USB drive ............................................................................................................................................ 165
Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions ........................................................................................................................ 167
Additional scan tasks .......................................................................................................................................................... 167
7 Fax .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 169
Set up fax .............................................................................................................................................................................. 170
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 170
Set up fax by using the printer control panel ............................................................................................. 170
Change fax congurations .................................................................................................................................................. 171
ENWW vii
Fax dialing settings ......................................................................................................................................... 171
General fax send settings .............................................................................................................................. 172
Fax receive settings ........................................................................................................................................ 173
Send a fax ............................................................................................................................................................................. 174
Additional fax tasks ............................................................................................................................................................. 176
8 Manage the printer .............................................................................................................................................................................. 177
Advanced conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ........................................................................... 178
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 178
How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) ................................................................................ 178
HP Embedded Web Server features ............................................................................................................. 180
Information tab ........................................................................................................................... 180
General tab .................................................................................................................................. 181
Copy/Print tab ............................................................................................................................. 182
Scan/Digital Send tab ................................................................................................................ 182
Fax tab .......................................................................................................................................... 183
Supplies tab ................................................................................................................................. 184
Troubleshooting tab ................................................................................................................... 184
Security tab ................................................................................................................................. 185
HP Web Services tab .................................................................................................................. 186
Networking tab ........................................................................................................................... 186
Other Links list ............................................................................................................................ 188
Congure IP network settings ........................................................................................................................................... 189
Printer sharing disclaimer .............................................................................................................................. 189
View or change network settings ................................................................................................................. 189
Rename the printer on a network ................................................................................................................ 189
Manually congure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel ...................................................... 190
Manually congure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel ...................................................... 190
Link speed and duplex settings .................................................................................................................... 191
Printer security features ..................................................................................................................................................... 193
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 193
Security statements ....................................................................................................................................... 193
Assign an administrator password ............................................................................................................... 194
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to set the password ......................................... 194
Provide user access credentials at the printer control panel .............................................. 194
IP Security ......................................................................................................................................................... 195
Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks ................................................................ 195
Lock the formatter .......................................................................................................................................... 195
Energy-conservation settings ........................................................................................................................................... 196
Set the sleep timer and congure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power ...................................... 196
Set the sleep schedule ................................................................................................................................... 196
viii ENWW
Set the idle settings ........................................................................................................................................ 197
HP Web Jetadmin ................................................................................................................................................................. 197
Software and rmware updates ........................................................................................................................................ 197
9 Solve problems ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 199
Customer support ................................................................................................................................................................ 200
Control panel help system ................................................................................................................................................. 200
Reset factory settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 201
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 201
Method one: Reset factory settings from the printer control panel ....................................................... 201
Method two: Reset factory settings from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected
printers only) .................................................................................................................................................... 201
A “Cartridge is low” or “Cartridge is very low” message displays on the printer control panel ............................... 202
Change the “Very Low” settings ................................................................................................................... 203
Change the “Very Low” settings at the control panel ........................................................... 203
For printers with fax capability ................................................................................................. 203
Order supplies .................................................................................................................................................. 203
Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds .................................................................................................................... 205
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 205
The printer does not pick up paper .............................................................................................................. 205
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper ............................................................................................ 208
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper ............................................ 212
Clear paper jams .................................................................................................................................................................. 213
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 213
Paper jam locations ........................................................................................................................................ 213
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams ..................................................................................................... 214
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams? ....................................................................................... 214
Clear paper jams in the document feeder - 31.13.yz ............................................................................... 215
Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1) ............................................................................................................... 216
Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2) ............................................................................................................... 221
Clear paper jams in the fuser (13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF) ................................................................................. 227
Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1) ................................................................................................. 232
Clear paper jams in the duplex area (13.D3) .............................................................................................. 234
Clear paper jams in the 550-sheet trays (13.A3, 13.A4) .......................................................................... 239
Clear paper jams in the 2 x 550 paper trays (13.A4, 13.A5) .................................................................... 246
Clear paper jams in the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5,
13.A7) ................................................................................................................................................................ 253
Resolving color print quality problems ............................................................................................................................ 261
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 261
Troubleshoot print quality ............................................................................................................................. 262
Update the printer rmware ..................................................................................................... 262
ENWW ix
Print from a dierent software program ................................................................................ 262
Check the paper-type setting for the print job ...................................................................... 263
Check the paper type setting on the printer ..................................................... 263
Check the paper type setting (Windows) ........................................................... 263
Check the paper type setting (macOS) ............................................................... 263
Check toner-cartridge status .................................................................................................... 264
Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page .......................................................... 264
Step two: Check supplies status .......................................................................... 264
Print a cleaning page .................................................................................................................. 264
Visually inspect the toner cartridge or cartridges ................................................................. 265
Check paper and the printing environment ............................................................................ 266
Step one: Use paper that meets HP specications .......................................... 266
Step two: Check the environment ....................................................................... 266
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment .................................................... 266
Try a dierent print driver ......................................................................................................... 267
Troubleshoot color quality ............................................................................................................................. 268
Calibrate the printer to align the colors .................................................................................. 268
Troubleshoot image defects ......................................................................................................................... 268
Improve copy image quality ............................................................................................................................................... 277
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges .......................................................................................... 277
Calibrate the scanner ...................................................................................................................................... 278
Check the paper settings ............................................................................................................................... 280
Check the paper selection options ........................................................................................... 280
Check the image-adjustment settings ........................................................................................................ 280
Optimize copy quality for text or pictures ................................................................................................... 280
Edge-to-edge copying .................................................................................................................................... 281
Improve scan image quality ............................................................................................................................................... 282
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges .......................................................................................... 282
Check the resolution settings ....................................................................................................................... 283
Check the color settings ................................................................................................................................. 284
Check the image-adjustment settings ........................................................................................................ 284
Optimize scan quality for text or pictures ................................................................................................... 285
Check the output-quality settings ................................................................................................................ 285
Improve fax image quality .................................................................................................................................................. 286
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges .......................................................................................... 286
Check the send-fax resolution settings ....................................................................................................... 287
Check the image-adjustment settings ........................................................................................................ 288
Optimize fax quality for text or pictures ...................................................................................................... 288
Check the error-correction setting ............................................................................................................... 289
Check the t-to-page setting ........................................................................................................................ 289
Send to a dierent fax machine .................................................................................................................... 289
x ENWW
Check the sender's fax machine ................................................................................................................... 289
Solve wired network problems .......................................................................................................................................... 290
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 290
Poor physical connection ............................................................................................................................... 290
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer ....................................................................... 290
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network ................................................. 291
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems ....................................................... 291
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly ....................................................................... 291
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect ............................................................. 291
Solve wireless network problems ..................................................................................................................................... 292
Introduction ...................................................................................................................................................... 292
Wireless connectivity checklist ...................................................................................................................... 292
The printer does not print after the wireless conguration completes .................................................. 293
The printer does not print, and the computer has a third-party rewall installed ............................... 293
The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or printer .......................... 293
Cannot connect more computers to the wireless printer ......................................................................... 294
The wireless printer loses communication when connected to a VPN ................................................... 294
The network does not appear in the wireless networks list .................................................................... 294
The wireless network is not functioning ..................................................................................................... 294
Reduce interference on a wireless network ................................................................................................ 295
Solve fax problems .............................................................................................................................................................. 296
Checklist for solving fax problems ............................................................................................................... 297
What type of phone line are you using? ................................................................................. 297
Are you using a surge-protection device? .............................................................................. 297
Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine? . 298
Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature? ............................................................... 298
Check fax accessory status ....................................................................................................... 298
General fax problems ..................................................................................................................................... 300
The fax failed to send ................................................................................................................ 300
No fax address book button displays ...................................................................................... 300
Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin ...................................................... 300
The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled ..... 300
A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box .......................................................... 300
A one-page fax prints as two pages ........................................................................................ 301
A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing ................................... 301
The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low ............... 301
Index ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 303
ENWW xi
xii ENWW
1 Printer overview
Review the location of features on the printer, the physical and technical specications of the printer, and where
to locate setup information.
●Warning icons
●Potential shock hazard
●Printer views
●Printer specications
●Printer hardware setup and software installation
For video assistance, see www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
●Install and congure
●Learn and use
●Solve problems
●Download software and rmware updates
●Join support forums
●Find warranty and regulatory information
Warning icons
Use caution if you see a warning icon on your HP printer, as indicated in the icon denitions.
●Caution: Electric shock
ENWW 1
●Caution: Hot surface
●Caution: Keep body parts away from moving parts
●Caution: Sharp edge in close proximity
●Warning
Potential shock hazard
Review this important safety information.
2 Chapter 1 Printer overview ENWW
●Read and understand these safety statements to avoid an electrical shock hazard.
●Always follow basic safety precautions when using this product to reduce risk of injury from re or electric
shock.
●Read and understand all instructions in the user guide.
●Observe all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
●Use only a grounded electrical outlet when connecting the product to a power source. If you do not know
whether the outlet is grounded, check with a qualied electrician.
●Do not touch the contacts on any of the sockets on the product. Replace damaged cords immediately.
●Unplug this product from wall outlets before cleaning.
●Do not install or use this product near water or when you are wet.
●Install the product securely on a stable surface.
●Install the product in a protected location where no one can step on or trip over the power cord.
ENWW Potential shock hazard 3
Printer views
Identify certain parts of the printer and the control panel.
●Printer front view
●Printer back view
●Interface ports
●Control-panel view
Printer front view
Locate features on the front of the printer.
1
2
11
7
5
3
13
14
8
4
6
10
16
17
9
12
15
Number Description
1 Retractable keyboard (Flow models)
2 Control panel
3 Document feeder cover
4 Document feeder output bin
5 Upper-right door (access to clear jams)
6 Right door (access to the fuser and to clear jams)
7 Tray 1
8On/o button
9 Model name
4 Chapter 1 Printer overview ENWW
Number Description
10 Tray 2
11 Front door (access to the toner cartridges, imaging drums, and waste toner collection unit)
12 Output bin
13 Easy-access USB port
Insert a USB ash drive for printing without a computer or to update the printer rmware.
NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.
14 Hardware integration pocket for connecting accessory and third-party devices
15 Inline nisher (zs model only)
16 1 x 550 paper tray (included with the zs model; optional accessory for other models)
17 2 x 550 paper tray (included with the zs model; optional accessory for other models)
Printer back view
Locate features on the back of the printer.
1
2
4
5
3
6
Number Description
1 Formatter cover
2 Slot for a cable-type security lock
3 Formatter (contains the interface ports)
4 Left door (access to the toner-collection unit)
NOTE: The front door also must be opened in order to access the toner-collection unit.
ENWW Printer views 5
Number Description
5 Power connection
6 Serial number and product number label
Interface ports
Locate the interface ports on the printer formatter.
1
2
33
4
Number Description
1 USB ports for connecting external USB devices (these ports might be covered)
NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port near the control panel.
2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet 10/100/1000 network port
3 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port
4 Fax port (fax models)
6 Chapter 1 Printer overview ENWW
Control-panel view
The control panel provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.
●How to use the touchscreen control panel
NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.
The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.
Return to the Home screen at any time by touching the Home button. Touch the Home button on the left
side of the printer control panel, or touch the Home button in the upper-left corner of most screens.
NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer conguration.
Figure 1-1 Control-panel view
?i 12:42 PM
1
7
6
23 45
8
Item Control Description
1Home button Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.
2Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings and is always present if users
are not logged in. The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out button is present.
Touch the Reset button to resume and release jobs from the previous pause state and
interrupt mode, reset the quick copy count in the copy count eld, exit special modes,
reset the display language and the keyboard layout.
3Sign In or Sign Out button Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.
Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The printer restores all options to
the default settings.
NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has congured the printer to
require permission for access to features.
ENWW Printer views 7
Item Control Description
4Information button Touch the information button to access a screen that provides access to several types
of printer information. Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for the following
information:
●Display Language: Change the language setting for the current user session.
●Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.
●Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect directly to the printer using a
phone, tablet, or other device with Wi-Fi.
●Wireless: View or change wireless connection settings (only when an optional
wireless accessory is installed).
●Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection settings.
●HP Web Services: View information to connect and print to the printer using
HP Web Services (ePrint).
5Help button Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.
The status line provides information about the overall printer status.
6 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the screen sideways to access
more applications.
NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The administrator can congure
which applications appear and the order in which they appear.
7Copy button Touch the Copy button to start a copy job.
8 Home-screen page indicator Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in an application. The current
page is highlighted. Swipe the screen sideways to scroll between pages.
How to use the touchscreen control panel
Perform the following actions to use the printer touchscreen control panel.
Table 1-1 Touchscreen control panel actions
Action Description Example
Touch Touch an item on the screen to select that item
or open that menu. Also, when scrolling through
menus, briey touch the screen to stop the
scrolling.
Touch the Settings icon to open the Settings app.
8 Chapter 1 Printer overview ENWW
Table 1-1 Touchscreen control panel actions (continued)
Action Description Example
Swipe Touch the screen and then move your nger
horizontally to scroll the screen sideways.
Swipe until the Settings app displays.
Scroll Touch the screen and then move your nger
vertically to scroll the screen up and down. When
scrolling through menus, briey touch the screen
to stop the scrolling.
Scroll through the Settings app.
ENWW Printer views 9
Printer specications
Determine the specications for your printer model.
●Technical specications
●Supported operating systems
●Mobile printing solutions
●Printer dimensions
●Power consumption, electrical specications, and acoustic emissions
●Operating-environment range
IMPORTANT: The following specications are correct at the time of publication, but they are subject to change.
For current information, see www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP.
Technical specications
Review the printer technical specications.
See www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP for current information.
Product numbers for each model
●M776dn - #T3U55A
●Flow M776z - #3WT91A
●Flow M776zs - #T3U56A
Table 1-2 Paper handling specications
Paper handling features M776dn Flow M776z Flow M776zs
Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity) Included Included Included
Tray 2 (550-sheet capacity) Included Included Included
550-sheet paper tray
NOTE: The M776dn models accept one optional
550-sheet tray.
Optional Included Not included
2 x 550-sheet paper tray and stand
NOTE: The M776dn models accept one optional
550-sheet tray that may be installed on top of the
stand.
Optional Included Included
2,700-sheet high-capacity input (HCI) paper tray and
stand
NOTE: The M776dn models accept one optional
550-sheet tray that may be installed on top of the
optional printer stand.
Optional Not included Not included
10 Chapter 1 Printer overview ENWW
Table 1-2 Paper handling specications (continued)
Paper handling features M776dn Flow M776z Flow M776zs
Printer stand
NOTE: The M776dn models accept one optional
550-sheet tray that may be installed on top of the
optional printer stand.
Optional Not included Not included
Inner nisher accessory Not included Not included Included
Automatic duplex printing Included Included Included
Table 1-3 Connectivity specications
Connectivity features M776dn Flow M776z Flow M776zs
10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connection with IPv4 and
IPv6
Included Included Included
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Included Included Included
Easy-access USB port for printing from a USB ash
drive or upgrading the rmware
Included Included Included
Hardware Integration Pocket for connecting accessory
and third-party devices
Included Included Included
HP Internal USB Ports Optional Optional Optional
HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server accessory for Wi-Fi
connectivity and an additional Ethernet port
Optional Optional Optional
HP Jetdirect 3100w accessory for Wi-Fi, BLE, NFC, and
proximity badge reading
Optional Included Included
Table 1-4 Print specications
Print features M776dn Flow M776z Flow M776zs
Prints 45 pages per minute (ppm) on Letter-size
paper and 46 ppm on A4-size paper
Included Included Included
Easy-access USB printing for printing from a USB
ash drive
Included Included Included
Store jobs in the printer memory to print later or print
privately
Included Included Included
Table 1-5 Copy and scan specications
Copy and scan features M776dn Flow M776z Flow M776zs
Scans 100 pages per minute (ppm) on A4 and letter-
size paper one-sided
Included Included Included
200-page document feeder with dual-head scanning
for single-pass duplex copying and scanning
Included Included Included
ENWW Printer specications 11
Table 1-5 Copy and scan specications (continued)
Copy and scan features M776dn Flow M776z Flow M776zs
HP EveryPage Technologies including ultrasonic
multi-feed detection
Not included Included Included
Embedded optical character recognition (OCR)
provides the ability to convert printed pages into text
that can be edited or searched using a computer
Not included Included Included
SMART Label feature provides paper-edge detection
for automatic page cropping
Included Included Included
Automatic page orientation for pages that have at
least 100 characters of text
Included Included Included
Automatic tone adjustment sets contrast, brightness,
and background removal for each page
Included Included Included
Table 1-6 Digital Send specications
Digital Send features M776dn Flow M776z Flow M776zs
Send documents to email, USB, and shared folders on
a network
Included Included Included
Send documents to SharePoint® Included Included Included
Table 1-7 Other specications
Other features M776dn Flow M776z Flow M776zs
Memory: 2.5 GB base memory
NOTE: Memory reported on the conguration page
will change from 2.5 GB to 3 GB with the optional 1
GB SODIMM installed.
Included Included Included
Mass storage: 500 GB hard disk drive Included Included Included
Security: HP Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Included Included Included
color touchscreen Included Included Included
Retractable keyboard Not included Included Included
Fax Optional Included Included
Supported operating systems
Use the following information to ensure printer compatibility with your computer operating system.
Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.
UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.
The following information applies to the printer-specic Windows HP PCL 6 print drivers, HP print drivers for
macOS, and to the software installer.
12 Chapter 1 Printer overview ENWW
Windows: Download HP Easy Start from 123.hp.com/LaserJet to install the HP print driver. Or, go to the printer-
support website for this printer: www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP to download the print driver or the
software installer to install the HP print driver.
macOS: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com/
LaserJet or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver.
1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.
2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.
Table 1-8 Supported operating systems and print drivers
Operating system Print driver (for Windows, or the installer on the web for macOS)
Windows 7, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL 6” printer-specic print driver is installed for this operating system as part of
the software installation.
Windows 8.1, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specic print driver is installed for this operating system as part
of the software installation.
Windows 10, 32-bit and 64-bit The “HP PCL-6” V4 printer-specic print driver is installed for this operating system as part
of the software installation.
Windows Server 2008 R2, SP 1, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it.
Windows Server 2012, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it.
Windows Server 2012 R2, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it.
Windows Server 2016, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it.
Windows Server 2019, 64-bit The PCL 6 printer-specic print driver is available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it.
macOS 10.13 High Sierra, macOS 10.14
Mojave
Download HP Easy Start from 123.hp.com/LaserJet, and then use it to install the print
driver.
NOTE: Supported operating systems can change.
NOTE: For a current list of supported operating systems and HP’s all-inclusive help for the printer, go to
www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP.
NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP UPD driver support for this printer, go to
www.hp.com/go/upd. Under Additional information, click Specications.
Table 1-9 Minimum system requirements
Windows macOS
●Internet connection
●Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network connection
●2 GB of available hard-disk space
●1 GB RAM (32-bit) or 2 GB RAM (64-bit)
●Internet connection
●Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network connection
●1.5 GB of available hard-disk space
ENWW Printer specications 13
NOTE: The Windows software installer installs the HP Smart Device Agent Base service. The le size is less than
100 kb. Its only function is to check for printers connected via USB hourly. No data is collected. If a USB printer is
found, it then tries to locate a JetAdvantage Management Connector (JAMc) instance on the network. If a JAMc is
found, the HP Smart Device Agent Base is securely upgraded to a full Smart Device Agent from JAMc, which will
then allow printed pages to be accounted for in a Managed Print Services (MPS) account. The driver-only web
packs downloaded from www.hp.com for the printer and installed through the Add Printer wizard do not install
this service.
To uninstall the service, open the Control Panel, select Programs or Programs and Features, and then select Add/
Remove Programs or Uninstall a Program to remove the service. The le name is HPSmartDeviceAgentBase.
Mobile printing solutions
HP oers multiple mobile printing solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device.
To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to www.hp.com/go/MobilePrinting.
NOTE: Update the printer rmware to ensure all mobile printing capabilities are supported.
●Wi-Fi Direct (wireless models only, with HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless accessory installed)
●HP ePrint via email (Requires HP Web Services to be enabled and the printer to be registered with
HP Connected)
●HP Smart app
●Google Cloud Print
●AirPrint
●Android Printing
●HP Roam
Printer dimensions
Make sure your printer environment is large enough to accommodate the printer.
Table 1-10 Dimensions for the base printer—M776dn
Dimension Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
Height 710 mm (28 in) 1025 mm (40.4 in)
Depth 663 mm (26.1 in) 1103 mm (43.4 in)
Width 585 mm (23 in) 1051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight 70.9 kg (156.3) 70.9 kg (156.3)
Table 1-11 Dimensions for the M776z printer
Dimension Printer and accessories fully closed Printer and accessories fully opened
Height 1034 mm (40.7 in) 1475 mm (58.1 in)
Depth 712 mm (28 in) 1115 mm (43.9 in)
14 Chapter 1 Printer overview ENWW
Table 1-11 Dimensions for the M776z printer (continued)
Dimension Printer and accessories fully closed Printer and accessories fully opened
Width 585 mm (23 in) 1051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight 104 kg (229.3 lb) 104 kg (229.3 lb)
Table 1-12 Dimensions for the M776zs printer
Dimension Printer and accessories fully closed Printer and accessories fully opened
Height 1160 mm (45.7 in) 1480 mm (58.3 in)
Depth 712 mm (28 in) 1103 mm (43.4 in)
Width 705 mm (27.8 in) 1280 mm (50.4 in)
Weight 119.7 kg (263.9 lb) 119.7 kg (263.9 lb)
Table 1-13 Dimensions for the 550-sheet paper tray
Dimension Accessory fully closed Accessory fully open
Height 150 mm (5.9 in) (includes alignment pins) 150 mm (5.9 in) (includes alignment pins)
Depth 584 mm (23 in) 1003 mm (39.5 in)
Width 556 mm (21.9 in) 640 mm (25.2 in)
Weight 10.2 kg (22.5 lb) 10.2 kg (22.5 lb)
Table 1-14 Dimensions for the base printer with one 550-sheet paper tray
Dimension Printer fully closed Printer fully opened
Height 836 mm (32.9 in) 1156 mm (45.5 in)
Depth 663 mm (26.1 in) 1115 mm (43.9 in)
Width 585 mm (23 in) 1051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight 81.1 kg (178.8 lb) 81.1 kg (178.8 lb)
Table 1-15 Dimensions for the 2 x 550-sheet paper tray and stand
Dimension Accessory fully closed Accessory fully open
Height 347 mm (13.7 in) (includes alignment pins) 347 mm (13.7 in) (includes alignment pins)
Depth1659 mm (25.9 in) 1074 mm (42.3 in)
Width1556 mm (21.9 in) 771 mm (30.4 in)
Weight122.9 kg (50.5lb) 22.9 kg (50.5lb)
1Does not include stability feet.
ENWW Printer specications 15
Table 1-16 Dimensions for the base printer with the 2 x 550-sheet paper tray and stand
Dimension Printer and accessories fully closed Printer and accessories fully opened
Height 909 mm (35.8 in) 1354 mm (53.3 in)
Depth1712 mm (28 in) 1115 mm (43.9 in)
Width1585 mm (23 in) 1051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight193.8 kg (206.8 lb) 93.8 kg (206.8 lb)
1Does not include stability feet.
Table 1-17 Dimensions for the high-capacity input paper tray and stand
Dimension Accessory fully closed Accessory fully open
Height 347 mm (13.7 in) 347 mm (13.7 in)
Depth1659 mm (25.9 in) 1064 mm (41.9 in)
Width1556 mm (21.9 in) 771 mm (30.4 in)
Weight128.2 kg (62.2 lb) 28.2 kg (62.2 lb)
1Does not include stability feet.
Table 1-18 Dimensions for the base printer with the high-capacity input paper tray and stand
Dimension Printer and accessories fully closed Printer and accessories fully opened
Height 909 mm (35.8 in) 1354 mm (53.3 in)
Depth1712 mm (28 in) 1115 mm (43.9 in)
Width1585 mm (23 in) 1051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight199.1 kg (218.5 lb) 99.1 kg (218.5 lb)
1Does not include stability feet.
Table 1-19 Dimensions for the printer stand
Dimension Accessory fully closed Accessory fully open
Height 347 mm (13.7 in) 347 mm (13.7 in)
Depth1659 mm (25.9 in) 1185 mm (46.7 in)
Width1556 mm (21.9 in) 556 mm (21.9 in)
Weight119 kg (41.9 lb) 19 kg (41.9 lb)
1Does not include stability feet.
Table 1-20 Dimensions for the base printer with the printer stand
Dimension Printer and accessories fully closed Printer and accessories fully opened
Height 909 mm (35.8 in) 1354 mm (53.3 in)
16 Chapter 1 Printer overview ENWW
Table 1-20 Dimensions for the base printer with the printer stand (continued)
Dimension Printer and accessories fully closed Printer and accessories fully opened
Depth1712 mm (28 in) 1230 mm (48.4 in)
Width1585 mm (23 in) 1051 mm (41.4 in)
Weight189.9 kg (198.2 lb) 89.9 kg (198.2 lb)
1Does not include stability feet.
Power consumption, electrical specications, and acoustic emissions
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain power specications.
See www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP for current information.
CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.
Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specications.
Table 1-21 Operating-environment specications
Environment Recommended Allowed
Temperature 15° to 27°C (59° to 80.6°F) 10° to 32.5°C (50° to 90.5°F)
Relative humidity 30% to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10% to 80% RH
Printer hardware setup and software installation
For basic setup instructions, see the Hardware Installation Guide that came with the printer. For additional
instructions, go to HP support on the web.
Go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP for HP's all-inclusive help for the printer, which includes the
following information:
●Install and congure
●Learn and use
●Solve problems
●Download software and rmware updates
●Join support forums
●Find warranty and regulatory information
●Find instructions about how to use the Microsoft Add Printer tool
ENWW Printer hardware setup and software installation 17
18 Chapter 1 Printer overview ENWW
2 Paper trays
Discover how to load and use the paper trays, including how to load special items such as envelopes and labels.
●Introduction
●Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
●Load paper to Tray 2
●Load paper to the 550-sheet paper tray
●Load paper to the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays
●Load paper to the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays
●Load and print envelopes
●Load and print labels
For video assistance, see www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
●Install and congure
●Learn and use
●Solve problems
●Download software and rmware updates
●Join support forums
●Find warranty and regulatory information
Introduction
Use caution when loading the paper trays.
ENWW 19
CAUTION: Do not extend more than one paper tray at a time.
Do not use paper tray as a step.
Keep hands out of paper trays when closing.
All trays must be closed when moving the printer.
If the printer has a keyboard, close the keyboard tray when it is not in use.
20 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
The following information describes how to load paper into Tray 1.
●Load Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
●Tray 1 paper orientation
●Use alternative letterhead mode
Load Tray 1 (multipurpose tray)
Use the following process to load paper into Tray 1.
1. Open Tray 1.
2. Pull out the tray extension to support the paper.
ENWW Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 21
3. Use the blue adjustment latch to spread the paper
guides to the correct size, and then load paper in
the tray. For information about how to orient the
paper, see Tray 1 paper orientation on page 22.
Make sure that the paper ts under the ll line on
the paper guides.
NOTE: The maximum stack height is 10 mm (0.4
in), or approximately 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper.
4. Using the blue adjustment latch, adjust the side
guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack,
but do not bend it.
Tray 1 paper orientation
Position paper correctly in Tray 1 to ensure the best print quality.
Table 2-1 Letterhead or preprinted—portrait
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing 12x18, 11x17, RA3, SRA3, A3, 8K
(273x394 mm), 8K (270x390 mm), 8K
(260x368 mm), B4 (JIS), Legal, Ocio
(8.5x13), Ocio (216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-down
Bottom edge leading into the printer
22 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Table 2-1 Letterhead or preprinted—portrait (continued)
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, Executive, A5, 16K (197x273 mm)
16K (195x270 mm), 16K (184x260 mm), B5
(JIS), Double Japan Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Left side of pre-printed image leading into the printer
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode
enabled
12x18, 11x17, RA3, SRA3, A3, 8K
(273x394 mm), 8K (270x390 mm), 8K
(260x368 mm), B4 (JIS), Legal, Ocio
(8.5x13), Ocio (216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-up
Top edge leading into the printer
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode
enabled
A4, Letter, Executive, A5, 16K (197x273 mm)
16K (195x270 mm), 16K (184x260 mm), B5
(JIS), Double Japan Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Right side of pre-printed image leading into the printer
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
ENWW Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 23
Table 2-2 Letterhead or preprinted—landscape
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing 12x18, 11x17, RA3, SRA3, A3, 8K
(273x394 mm), 8K (270x390 mm), 8K
(260x368 mm), B4 (JIS), Legal, Ocio
(8.5x13), Ocio (216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-down
Left side of pre-printed image leading into the printer
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode
enabled
12x18, 11x17, RA3, SRA3, A3, 8K
(273x394 mm), 8K (270x390 mm), 8K
(260x368 mm), B4 (JIS), Legal, Ocio
(8.5x13), Ocio (216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-up
Right side of the pre-printed image leading into the printer
24 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Table 2-2 Letterhead or preprinted—landscape (continued)
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, Executive, A5, 16K (197x273 mm)
16K (195x270 mm), 16K (184x260 mm), B5
(JIS), Double Japan Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Bottom edge leading into the printer
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode
enabled
A4, Letter, Executive, A5, 16K (197x273 mm)
16K (195x270 mm), 16K (184x260 mm), B5
(JIS), Double Japan Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Top edge leading into the printer
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
ENWW Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 25
Table 2-3 Prepunched—portrait
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing 12x18, 11x17, RA3, SRA3, A3, 8K
(273x394 mm), 8K (270x390 mm), 8K
(260x368 mm), B4 (JIS), Legal, Ocio
(8.5x13), Ocio (216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-down
Holes toward the back of the printer
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode
enabled
12x18, 11x17, RA3, SRA3, A3, 8K
(273x394 mm), 8K (270x390 mm), 8K
(260x368 mm), B4 (JIS), Legal, Ocio
(8.5x13), Ocio (216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-up
Holes toward the back of the printer
26 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Table 2-4 Prepunched—landscape
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, Executive, A5, 16K (197x273 mm)
16K (195x270 mm), 16K (184x260 mm), B5
(JIS), Double Japan Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Holes away from the printer
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode
enabled
A4, Letter, Executive, A5, 16K (197x273 mm)
16K (195x270 mm), 16K (184x260 mm), B5
(JIS), Double Japan Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Holes towards the printer
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
ENWW Load paper to Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) 27
Use alternative letterhead mode
Use the Alternative Letterhead Mode feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way
for all jobs, whether printing to one side of the sheet of paper or to both sides. When using this mode, load paper
as for automatic duplex printing.
●Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Use the Settings menu to set the Alternative Letterhead Mode setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to and open the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Trays
c. Alternative Letterhead Mode
3. Select On.
28 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Load paper to Tray 2
The following information describes how to load paper into Tray 2.
●Load Tray 2
●Tray 2 paper orientation
●Use alternative letterhead mode
Load Tray 2
Use the following process to load paper into Tray 2.
1. Open the tray.
NOTE: Do not open this tray while the printer is
printing.
2. Before loading paper, adjust the paper-width
guides by squeezing the blue adjustment latches
and sliding the guides to the size of the paper
being used.
3. Adjust the paper-length guide by squeezing the
adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size
of the paper being used.
ENWW Load paper to Tray 2 29
4. Load paper into the tray. For information about
how to orient the paper, see Tray 2 paper
orientation on page 31.
NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overll the tray.
Be sure that the top of the stack is below the tray
full indicator.
5. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch
the stack, but do not bend it.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly
against the paper stack. Adjust them to the
indentations or markings in the tray.
6. Close the tray.
7. The tray conguration message displays on the
printer control panel.
8. Press the OK button to accept the detected type
and size, or select Modify to choose a dierent
paper size or type.
For custom-size paper, specify the X and Y
dimensions for the paper when the prompt
displays on the printer control panel.
Y
X
30 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Tray 2 paper orientation
Position paper correctly in Tray 2 to ensure the best print quality.
Table 2-5 Letterhead or preprinted—portrait
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Top edge at the back of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
1-sided printing 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4, A4, Letter
Face-up
Top edge at the right side of the tray
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Top edge at the back of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4, A4, Letter
Face-down
Top edge at the left side of the tray
ENWW Load paper to Tray 2 31
Table 2-6 Letterhead or preprinted—landscape
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Top edge at the right side of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
1-sided printing 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4, A4, Letter
Face-up
Top edge at the back of the tray
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Top edge at the left side of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4, A4, Letter
Face-down
Top edge at the back of the tray
32 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Table 2-7 Prepunched—portrait
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Holes at the left side of the tray, with the top of the form at the
rear of the printer
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
1-sided printing 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4, A4, Letter
Face-up
Holes at the back of the tray
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Holes at the right side of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA4, RA4, A4, Letter
Face-down
Holes at the back of the tray
ENWW Load paper to Tray 2 33
Use alternative letterhead mode
Use the Alternative Letterhead Mode feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way
for all jobs, whether printing to one side of the sheet of paper or to both sides. When using this mode, load paper
as for automatic duplex printing.
●Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Use the Settings menu to set the Alternative Letterhead Mode setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to and open the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Trays
c. Alternative Letterhead Mode
3. Select On.
34 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Load paper to the 550-sheet paper tray
The following information describes how to load paper into the 550-sheet paper tray.
●Load paper to the 550-sheet paper tray
●550-sheet paper tray paper orientation
●Use alternative letterhead mode
Load paper to the 550-sheet paper tray
Use the following process to load paper into the 550-sheet paper tray.
1. Open the tray.
NOTE: Do not open this tray while the printer is
printing.
2. Before loading paper, adjust the paper-width
guides by squeezing the blue adjustment latches
and sliding the guides to the size of the paper
being used.
3. Adjust the paper-length guide by squeezing the
adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size
of the paper being used.
ENWW Load paper to the 550-sheet paper tray 35
4. For any of the following paper sizes, also adjust
the blue paper-stop lever in the left rear corner of
the tray to the correct position, as indicated by the
label in the tray:
●12 x 18
●RA3
●11 x 17
●A3
●SRA3
5. Load paper into the tray. For information about
how to orient the paper, see 550-sheet paper tray
paper orientation on page 37.
NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overll the tray.
Be sure that the top of the stack is below the tray
full indicator.
6. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch
the stack, but do not bend it.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly
against the paper stack. Adjust them to the
indentations or markings in the tray.
7. Close the tray.
36 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
8. The tray conguration message displays on the
printer control panel.
9. Press the OK button to accept the detected type
and size, or select Modify to choose a dierent
paper size or type.
For custom-size paper, specify the X and Y
dimensions for the paper when the prompt
displays on the printer control panel.
X
Y
550-sheet paper tray paper orientation
Position paper correctly in the 550-sheet tray to ensure the best print quality.
Table 2-8 Letterhead or preprinted—portrait
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Top edge at the back of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
1-sided printing 12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-up
Top edge at the right side of the tray
ENWW Load paper to the 550-sheet paper tray 37
Table 2-8 Letterhead or preprinted—portrait (continued)
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Top edge at the back of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-down
Top edge at the left side of the tray
Table 2-9 Letterhead or preprinted—landscape
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Top edge at the right side of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
1-sided printing 12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-up
Top edge at the back of the tray
38 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Table 2-9 Letterhead or preprinted—landscape (continued)
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-down
Top edge at the back of the tray
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Top edge at the left side of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Table 2-10 Prepunched—portrait
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Holes at the left side of the tray, with the top of the form at the
rear of the printer
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
1-sided printing 12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-up
Holes at the back of the tray
ENWW Load paper to the 550-sheet paper tray 39
Table 2-10 Prepunched—portrait (continued)
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Holes at the right side of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-down
Holes at the back of the tray
40 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Use alternative letterhead mode
Use the Alternative Letterhead Mode feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way
for all jobs, whether printing to one side of the sheet of paper or to both sides. When using this mode, load paper
as for automatic duplex printing.
●Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Use the Settings menu to set the Alternative Letterhead Mode setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to and open the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Trays
c. Alternative Letterhead Mode
3. Select On.
ENWW Load paper to the 550-sheet paper tray 41
Load paper to the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays
The following information describes how to load paper into the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays.
●Load paper to the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays
●2 x 550-sheet paper tray paper orientation
●Use alternative letterhead mode
Load paper to the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays
Use the following process to load paper into the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays.
1. Open the tray.
NOTE: Do not open this tray while the printer is
printing.
2. Before loading paper, adjust the paper-width
guides by squeezing the blue adjustment latches
and sliding the guides to the size of the paper
being used.
3. Adjust the paper-length guide by squeezing the
adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size
of the paper being used.
42 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
4. For any of the following paper sizes, also adjust
the blue paper-stop lever in the left rear corner of
the tray to the correct position, as indicated by the
label in the tray:
●12 x 18
●RA3
●11 x 17
●A3
●SRA3
5. Load paper into the tray. For information about
how to orient the paper, see 2 x 550-sheet paper
tray paper orientation on page 44.
NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overll the tray.
Be sure that the top of the stack is below the tray
full indicator.
6. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch
the stack, but do not bend it.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly
against the paper stack. Adjust them to the
indentations or markings in the tray.
7. Close the tray.
ENWW Load paper to the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays 43
8. The tray conguration message displays on the
printer control panel.
9. Press the OK button to accept the detected type
and size, or select Modify to choose a dierent
paper size or type.
For custom-size paper, specify the X and Y
dimensions for the paper when the prompt
displays on the printer control panel.
X
Y
2 x 550-sheet paper tray paper orientation
Position paper correctly in the 2 x 550-sheet trays to ensure the best print quality.
Table 2-11 Letterhead or preprinted—portrait
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Top edge at the back of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
1-sided printing 12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-up
Top edge at the right side of the tray
44 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Table 2-11 Letterhead or preprinted—portrait (continued)
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Top edge at the back of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-down
Top edge at the left side of the tray
Table 2-12 Letterhead or preprinted—landscape
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Top edge at the right side of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
1-sided printing 12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-up
Top edge at the back of the tray
ENWW Load paper to the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays 45
Table 2-12 Letterhead or preprinted—landscape (continued)
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-down
Top edge at the back of the tray
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Top edge at the left side of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Table 2-13 Prepunched—portrait
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-up
Holes at the left side of the tray, with the top of the form at the
rear of the printer
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
1-sided printing 12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-up
Holes at the back of the tray
46 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Table 2-13 Prepunched—portrait (continued)
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter, 16K (197x273 mm) 16K
(195x270 mm), Executive, A5, 16K
(184x260 mm), B5 (JIS), Double Japan
Postcard (148x200 mm)
Face-down
Holes at the right side of the tray
NOTE: This is the preferred orientation when printing on A4 or
Letter.
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
12x18, 11x17, A3, 8K (273x397 mm), 8K
(270x390 mm), 8K (260x368 mm), B4
(JIS), Legal, Ocio (8.5x13), Ocio
(216x340 mm), SRA3, RA3, SRA4, RA4,
A4, Letter
Face-down
Holes at the back of the tray
ENWW Load paper to the 2 x 550-sheet paper trays 47
Use alternative letterhead mode
Use the Alternative Letterhead Mode feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way
for all jobs, whether printing to one side of the sheet of paper or to both sides. When using this mode, load paper
as for automatic duplex printing.
●Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Use the Settings menu to set the Alternative Letterhead Mode setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to and open the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Trays
c. Alternative Letterhead Mode
3. Select On.
48 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Load paper to the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays
The following information describes how to load paper into the HCI paper trays.
●Load paper to the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays
●2,700-sheet HCI paper tray paper orientation
●Use alternative letterhead mode
Load paper to the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays
Use the following process to load paper into the HCI paper trays.
1. Release the tray latch, and then slide the tray away
from the printer to open it.
NOTE: Do not open this tray while the printer is
printing.
2. Adjust the paper-size guide to the correct position
for the paper.
11
A4
ENWW Load paper to the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays 49
3. Load paper into the tray. Check the paper to verify
the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend
it. For information about how to orient the paper,
see 2,700-sheet HCI paper tray paper orientation
on page 50.
NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overll the tray.
Be sure that the top of the stack is below the tray
full indicator.
NOTE: If the tray is not adjusted correctly, an
error message might appear during printing or the
paper might jam.
4. Close the tray.
5. The tray conguration message displays on the
printer control panel.
6. Press the OK button to accept the detected type
and size, or select Modify to choose a dierent
paper size or type.
2,700-sheet HCI paper tray paper orientation
Position paper correctly in the HCI trays to ensure the best print quality.
50 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Table 2-14 Letterhead or preprinted—portrait
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter Face-down
Top edge at the back of the tray
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter Face-up
Top edge at the back of the tray
ENWW Load paper to the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays 51
Table 2-15 Letterhead or preprinted—landscape
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter Face-down
Top edge at the left side of the tray
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter Face-up
Top edge at the right side of the tray
52 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Table 2-16 Prepunched-landscape
Duplex mode Paper size How to load paper
1-sided printing A4, Letter Face-down
Holes at the left side of the tray
Automatic 2-sided printing or with
Alternative Letterhead Mode enabled
A4, Letter Face-up
Holes at the right side of the tray, with the top of the form to the
right side
ENWW Load paper to the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays 53
Use alternative letterhead mode
Use the Alternative Letterhead Mode feature to load letterhead or preprinted paper into the tray the same way
for all jobs, whether printing to one side of the sheet of paper or to both sides. When using this mode, load paper
as for automatic duplex printing.
●Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Enable Alternative Letterhead Mode by using the printer control-panel menus
Use the Settings menu to set the Alternative Letterhead Mode setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to and open the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Trays
c. Alternative Letterhead Mode
3. Select On.
54 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Load and print envelopes
Use only Tray 1 to print on envelopes. Tray 1 holds up to 10 envelopes.
●Print envelopes
●Envelope orientation
Print envelopes
To print envelopes using the manual feed option, follow these steps to select the correct settings in the print
driver, and then load the envelopes into the tray after sending the print job to the printer.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
NOTE: To access these features from a Windows 8.1 Start screen app, select Devices, select Print, and
then select the printer.
NOTE: To access these features from Windows 10, select Print, and then select the printer.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. In the Paper size drop-down list, select the correct size for the envelopes.
5. In the Paper type drop-down list, select Envelope.
6. In the Paper source drop-down list, select Manual feed.
7. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box.
8. In the Print dialog box, click the OK button to print the job.
Envelope orientation
Envelopes need to be loaded in a specic manner in order to print correctly.
NOTE: The printer does not support duplex printing on envelopes.
ENWW Load and print envelopes 55
Table 2-17 Envelope orientation
Tray Envelope size How to load
Tray 1 Envelope #9, Envelope #10,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope B5, Envelope C5
(wallet), Envelope C6
Face-down
Top edge toward the back of the printer
Tray 1 Envelope B5, Envelope C5
(pocket)
Face-down
Top edge leading into the printer
56 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
Load and print labels
To print on sheets of labels, use Tray 1 or the 550-sheet trays.
●Manually feed labels
●Label orientation
Manually feed labels
Use the manual feed mode to print sheets of labels.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
NOTE: To access these features from a Windows 8.1 Start screen app, select Devices, select Print, and
then select the printer.
NOTE: To access these features from Windows 10, select Print, and then select the printer.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. In the Paper size drop-down list, select the correct size for the sheets of labels.
5. In the Paper type drop-down list, select Labels.
6. In the Paper source drop-down list, select Manual feed.
NOTE: When using manual feed, the printer prints from the lowest-numbered tray that is congured for
the correct size of paper, so it is not necessary to specify a particular tray. For example, if Tray 2 is
congured for labels, the printer will print from Tray 2. If Tray 3 is installed and congured for labels, but
Tray 2 is not congured for labels, the printer will print from Tray 3.
7. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box.
8. In the Print dialog box, click the Print button to print the job.
Label orientation
Labels need to be loaded in a specic manner in order to print correctly.
ENWW Load and print labels 57
Table 2-18 Label orientation
Tray How to load labels
Tray 1 Face-down
Bottom edge leading into the printer
550-sheet trays Face-up
Top edge at the back of the tray
58 Chapter 2 Paper trays ENWW
3 Supplies, accessories, and parts
Order supplies or accessories, replace the toner cartridges, or remove and replace another part.
●Order supplies, accessories, and parts
●Dynamic security
●Congure the HP toner-cartridge-protection supply settings
●Replace the toner cartridges
●Replace the imaging drums
●Replace the toner-collection unit
●Replace the staple cartridge (M776zs model only)
For video assistance, see www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
●Install and congure
●Learn and use
●Solve problems
●Download software and rmware updates
●Join support forums
●Find warranty and regulatory information
ENWW 59
Order supplies, accessories, and parts
Find out how to obtain replacement supplies, accessories, and parts for the printer.
●Ordering
●Supplies and accessories
●Maintenance/long-life consumables
●Customer self-repair parts
Ordering
Order parts, supplies, or accessories through one of the following channels.
Table 3-1 Ordering options
Ordering option Ordering information
Order supplies and paper http://www.hp.com/go/SureSupply
Order genuine HP parts or accessories www.hp.com/buy/parts
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your computer, enter the
printer IP address or host name in the address/URL eld. The EWS
contains a link to the HP SureSupply website, which provides
options for purchasing Original HP supplies.
Supplies and accessories
To order supplies or accessories, nd the correct part number.
Table 3-2 Supplies
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP 659A Black Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
Standard-yield replacement black toner
cartridge
659A W2010A
HP 659X High Yield Black Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-yield replacement black toner
cartridge
659X W2010X
HP 659A Cyan Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
Standard-yield replacement cyan toner
cartridge
659A W2011A
HP 659X High Yield Cyan Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-yield replacement cyan toner
cartridge
659X W2011X
HP 659A Magenta Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-yield replacement magenta
toner cartridge
659A W2013A
HP 659X High Yield Magenta Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-yield replacement magenta toner
cartridge
659X W2013X
HP 659A Yellow Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
Standard-yield replacement yellow
toner cartridge
659A W2012A
HP 659X High Yield Yellow Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-yield replacement yellow toner
cartridge
659X W2012X
60 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
Table 3-2 Supplies (continued)
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP Imaging Drum Replacement imaging drum 660A W2004A
HP Inner Finisher Staples Replacement staple cartridge for
models with inner nisher
Not applicable J8J96A
Table 3-3 Accessories
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP LaserJet 550-sheet Paper Tray Optional 550-sheet paper tray
NOTE: The printer supports up to two
550-sheet paper trays.
Not applicable T3V27A
HP LaserJet 2 x 550-sheet Paper Tray
and Stand
Optional 2 x 550-sheet paper tray and
stand to support the printer
Not applicable T3V29A
HP LaserJet 2,700-sheet HCI Paper
Tray and Stand
Optional 2,700-sheet paper tray and
stand to support the printer
Not applicable T3V30A
HP LaserJet Stand Optional printer stand Not applicable T3V28A
HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server HP Jetdirect accessory for Wi-Fi
connectivity and an additional Ethernet
port
Not applicable J8031A
HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless
Accessory
HP Jetdirect accessory for Wi-Fi, BLE,
NFC, and proximity badge reading
Not applicable 3JN69A
HP Internal USB ports Two optional USB ports for connecting
third-party devices
Not applicable B5L28A
HP Foreign Interface Harness Optional port accessory for connecting
third-party devices.
Not applicable B5L31A
HP Secure High Performance Hard Disk
Drive
Optional 500 GB FIPS140 certied hard
drive
Not applicable B5L29A
HP 1 GB DDR3 x32 144-Pin 800MHz
SODIMM
Optional DIMM for expanding the
memory
Not applicable E5K48A
Maintenance/long-life consumables
Maintain optimal print quality with Certied HP Genuine Long Life Consumables (LLCs).
Table 3-4 Maintenance/long-life consumables
Maintenance/LLC Kit Part number Estimated life1
HP LaserJet 110V Fuser Kit 4YL16A 150,000 pages*
HP LaserJet 220V Fuser Kit 4YL17A 150,000 pages*
HP LaserJet Image Transfer Kit 3WT89A 150,000 pages*
HP LaserJet Toner Collection Unit 3WT90A 90,000 pages*
1HP Maintenance/Long Life Consumables (LLC) life specications are estimations based on the LLC life test conditions listed below. Actual
individual life/yield during normal use varies depending on usage, environment, paper and other factors. Estimated life is not an implied
guarantee or warrantable.
ENWW Order supplies, accessories, and parts 61
*The LLC life test conditions:
●Print coverage: 5% evenly distributed across the page
●Environment: 17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F); 30%-70% relative humidity (RH)
●Media size: Letter/A4
●Media weight: 75 g/m2 (20 lb) plain media
●Job size: 4 pages or more on average
●Long-edge feed (Letter/A4)
Factors that can reduce life from the conditions above:
●Media narrower than Letter/A4 widths (thermal slowdowns equal more rotations)
●Paper heavier than 75 g/m2 (20 lb) (heavier media creates higher stress on printer components)
●Print jobs smaller than 4 pages (smaller jobs mean more thermal cycling and more rotations)
Customer self-repair parts
Customer Self-Repair (CSR) parts are available for many HP LaserJet printers to reduce repair time.
NOTE: More information about the CSR program and benets can be found at www.hp.com/go/csr-support and
www.hp.com/go/csr-faq.
Genuine HP replacement parts can be ordered at www.hp.com/buy/parts or by contacting an HP-authorized
service or support provider. When ordering, one of the following will be needed: part number, serial number
(found on back of printer), product number, or printer name.
●Parts listed as Mandatory self-replacement are to be installed by customers, unless you are willing to pay
HP service personnel to perform the repair. For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot support is not
provided under the HP printer warranty.
●Parts listed as Optional self-replacement can be installed by HP service personnel at your request for no
additional charge during the printer warranty period.
Table 3-5 Customer self-repair parts
Item Description Self-replacement options Part number
550-sheet paper tray Replacement 550-sheet paper tray Mandatory T3V27A
Toner collection unit Replacement toner collection unit Mandatory 3WT90A
Fuser Replacement fuser Mandatory 4YL16A (110V)
4YL17A (220V)
Image transfer kit Replacement intermediate transfer belt,
secondary transfer roller, and paper tray
rollers
Mandatory 3WT89A
Foreign interface harness Replacement foreign interface harness Mandatory B5L31A
Internal USB ports Replacement internal USB ports Mandatory B5L28A
Secure Hard Disk Drive Replacement hard disk drive Mandatory B5L29A
62 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
Table 3-5 Customer self-repair parts (continued)
Item Description Self-replacement options Part number
1 GB 90-Pin DDR3 x32 800 MHz SODIMM Replacement memory DIMM Mandatory E5K48A
HP Jetdirect 2900nw Print Server HP Jetdirect accessory for Wi-Fi connectivity
and an additional Ethernet port
Mandatory J8031A
HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless
Accessory
HP Jetdirect accessory for Wi-Fi, BLE, NFC,
and proximity badge reading
Mandatory 3JN69A
Dynamic security
Learn about dynamic-security-enabled printers.
Certain HP printers use cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a non-HP chip
or modied or non-HP circuitry* might not work. And, those that work today might not work in the future.
As is standard in the printing business, HP has a process for authenticating cartridges. HP continues to use
security measures to protect the quality of our customer experience, maintain the integrity of our printing
systems, and protect our intellectual property. These measures include authentication methods that change
periodically and might prevent some third-party supplies from working now or in the future. HP printers and
original HP cartridges deliver the best quality, security and reliability. When cartridges are cloned or
counterfeited, the customer is exposed to quality and potential security risks, compromising the printing
experience.
*Non-HP Chips and modied or non-HP electronic circuitry are not produced or validated by HP. HP cannot
guarantee that these chips or circuitry will work in your printer now or in the future. If you are using a non-
original HP cartridge, please check with your supplier to ensure your cartridge has an original HP security chip or
unmodied HP electronic circuitry.
ENWW Dynamic security 63
Congure the HP toner-cartridge-protection supply settings
A network administrator can congure the toner-cartridge-protection settings using the printer control panel or
the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
●Introduction
●Enable or disable the Cartridge Policy feature
●Enable or disable the Cartridge Protection feature
Introduction
Use HP Cartridge Policy and Cartridge Protection to control which cartridges are installed in the printer and
protect the cartridges that are installed from theft.
In HP Web Jetadmin, the settings are located under the Device Management pane in the following menu chain:
Cong > Supplies > Cartridge Policy or Cartridge Protection.
These features are available with HP FutureSmart versions 3 and later. Both features are o by default.
●Cartridge Policy: This feature protects the printer from counterfeit toner cartridges by allowing only genuine
HP cartridges to be used with the printer. Using genuine HP cartridges ensures the best possible print
quality. When someone installs a cartridge that is not a genuine HP cartridge, the printer control panel
displays a message that the cartridge is unauthorized and it provides information explaining how to
proceed.
●Cartridge Protection: This feature permanently associates toner cartridges with a specic printer, or eet of
printers, so they cannot be used in other printers. Protecting cartridges protects your investment. When
this feature is enabled, if someone attempts to transfer a protected cartridge from the original printer into
an unauthorized printer, that printer will not print with the protected cartridge. The printer control panel
displays a message that the cartridge is protected, and it provides information explaining how to proceed.
CAUTION: After enabling cartridge protection for the printer, all subsequent toner cartridges installed in
the printer are automatically and permanently protected. To avoid protecting a new cartridge, disable the
feature before installing the new cartridge.
Turning the feature o does not turn o protection for cartridges that are currently installed.
64 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
Enable or disable the Cartridge Policy feature
The Cartridge Policy feature can be enabled or disabled using the control panel or the Embedded Web Server
(EWS).
●Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Policy feature
●Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
●Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Policy feature
●Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
●Troubleshoot Cartridge Policy control panel error messages
NOTE: Enabling or disabling this feature might require entering an administrator password.
Check with your administrator to determine if an administrator password has been set. EWS passwords cannot
be recovered.
Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can enable the Cartridge Policy feature. This allows only
genuine HP cartridges to be used with the printer.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Cartridge Policy
3. Select Authorized HP.
Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can disable the Cartridge Policy feature. This removes
the restriction that only genuine HP cartridges can be used.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Cartridge Policy
3. Select O.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can enable the Cartridge Policy feature. This allows only genuine HP
cartridges to be used with the printer.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
ENWW Congure the HP toner-cartridge-protection supply settings 65
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Open the Copy/Print tab.
3. From the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select Authorized HP from the Cartridge Policy drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Policy feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can disable the Cartridge Policy feature. This removes the restriction that
only genuine HP cartridges can be used.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Open the Copy/Print tab.
3. From the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select O from the Cartridge Policy drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Troubleshoot Cartridge Policy control panel error messages
Review the recommended actions for Cartridge Policy error messages.
66 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
Table 3-6 Cartridge Policy control panel error messages
Error message Description Recommended action
10.0X.30 Unauthorized <Color> Cartridge The administrator has congured this
printer to use only genuine HP supplies that
are still under warranty. The cartridge must
be replaced to continue printing.
Replace the cartridge with a genuine HP
toner cartridge.
If you believe you purchased a genuine HP
supply, visit www.hp.com/go/anticounterfeit
to determine if the toner cartridge is a
genuine HP cartridge, and learn what to do if
it is not a genuine HP cartridge.
ENWW Congure the HP toner-cartridge-protection supply settings 67
Enable or disable the Cartridge Protection feature
The Cartridge Protection feature can be enabled or disabled using the control panel or the Embedded Web
Server (EWS).
●Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Protection feature
●Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Protection feature
●Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Protection feature
●Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Protection feature
●Troubleshoot Cartridge Protection control panel error messages
NOTE: Enabling or disabling this feature might require entering an administrator password.
Check with your administrator to determine if an administrator password has been set. EWS passwords cannot
be recovered.
Use the printer control panel to enable the Cartridge Protection feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can enable the Cartridge Protection feature. This
protects the cartridges associated with the printer from being stolen and used in other printers.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Cartridge Protection
3. Select Protect Cartridges.
4. When the printer prompts to conrm, select Continue to enable the feature.
CAUTION: After enabling cartridge protection for the printer, all subsequent toner cartridges installed in
the printer are automatically and permanently protected. To avoid protecting a new cartridge, disable the
feature before installing the new cartridge.
Turning the feature o does not turn o protection for cartridges that are currently installed.
Use the printer control panel to disable the Cartridge Protection feature
From the printer control panel, a network administrator can disable the Cartridge Protection feature. This
removes protection for any new cartridges installed in the printer.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Cartridge Protection
3. Select O.
68 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to enable the Cartridge Protection feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can enable the Cartridge Protection feature. This protects the cartridges
associated with the printer from being stolen and used in other printers.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Open the Copy/Print tab.
3. From the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select Protect cartridges from the Cartridge Protection drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
CAUTION: After enabling cartridge protection for the printer, all subsequent toner cartridges installed in
the printer are automatically and permanently protected. To avoid protecting a new cartridge, disable the
feature before installing the new cartridge.
Turning the feature o does not turn o protection for cartridges that are currently installed.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to disable the Cartridge Protection feature
From the EWS, a network administrator can disable the Cartridge Protection feature. This removes protection for
any new cartridges installed in the printer.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Open the Copy/Print tab.
3. From the left navigation pane, select Manage Supplies.
4. In the Supply Settings area, select O from the Cartridge Protection drop-down list.
5. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
ENWW Congure the HP toner-cartridge-protection supply settings 69
Troubleshoot Cartridge Protection control panel error messages
Review the recommended actions for Cartridge Protection error messages.
Table 3-7 Cartridge Protection control panel error messages
Error message Description Recommended action
10.0X.57 Protected <Color> Cartridge The cartridge can only be used in the printer
or eet of printers that initially protected it
using HP Cartridge Protection.
The Cartridge Protection feature allows an
administrator to restrict cartridges to work
in only one printer or eet of printers. The
cartridge must be replaced to continue
printing.
Replace the cartridge with a new toner
cartridge.
70 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
Replace the toner cartridges
Replace the toner cartridge if you receive a message on the printer, or if you have print quality problems.
●Toner-cartridge information
●Remove and replace the cartridges
Toner-cartridge information
This printer indicates when the toner-cartridge level is low and very low. The actual toner-cartridge life remaining
can vary. Consider having a replacement cartridge available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
To purchase cartridges or check cartridge compatibility for the printer, go to HP SureSupply at www.hp.com/go/
suresupply. Scroll to the bottom of the page and verify that the country/region is correct.
The printer uses four colors and has a dierent toner cartridge for each color: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C),
and black (K). The toner cartridges are inside the front door.
Table 3-8 Toner-cartridge information
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP 659A Black Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
Standard-yield replacement black toner
cartridge
659A W2010A
HP 659X High Yield Black Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-yield replacement black toner
cartridge
659X W2010X
HP 659A Cyan Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
Standard-yield replacement cyan toner
cartridge
659A W2011A
HP 659X High Yield Cyan Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-yield replacement cyan toner
cartridge
659X W2011X
HP 659A Magenta Original LaserJet
Toner Cartridge
Standard-yield replacement magenta
toner cartridge
659A W2013A
HP 659X High Yield Magenta Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-yield replacement magenta toner
cartridge
659X W2013X
HP 659A Yellow Original LaserJet Toner
Cartridge
Standard-yield replacement yellow
toner cartridge
659A W2012A
HP 659X High Yield Yellow Original
LaserJet Toner Cartridge
High-yield replacement yellow toner
cartridge
659X W2012X
NOTE: High-yield toner cartridges contain more toner than standard cartridges for increased page yield. For
more information, go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until it is time to replace it.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
Cover the green imaging drum if the toner cartridge must be removed from the printer for an extended period of
time.
CAUTION: Do not touch the developer roller. Fingerprints on the developer roller can cause print-quality
problems.
The following illustration shows the toner-cartridge components.
ENWW Replace the toner cartridges 71
Number Description
1 Handle
2 Developer roller
3 Protective shield
4 Memory chip
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it o by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water
sets toner into fabric.
NOTE: Information about recycling used toner cartridges is in the toner-cartridge box.
Remove and replace the cartridges
Follow these steps to replace a toner cartridge.
72 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
1. Open the front door.
2. Grasp the handle of the used toner cartridge and
pull out to remove it.
ENWW Replace the toner cartridges 73
3. Remove the new toner cartridge from its
packaging by removing the end caps (callout 1),
removing the cartridge from the plastic bag
(callout 2), and then removing the orange
protective shield (callout 3).
NOTE: Do not touch the developer roller.
Fingerprints on the developer roller can cause
print-quality problems.
2
1
3
4. Hold both ends of the toner cartridge and rock it
5-6 times.
74 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
5. Support the toner cartridge underneath with one
hand while holding the cartridge handle with the
other. Align the toner cartridge with its slot on the
shelf, and then insert the toner cartridge into the
printer.
NOTE: Avoid touching the developer roller.
Fingerprints on the developer roller can cause print
defects.
6. Close the front door.
Save all packaging for recycling the used toner
cartridge. To recycle the used cartridge, follow the
instructions included with the new cartridge.
ENWW Replace the toner cartridges 75
Replace the imaging drums
Replace an imaging drum if you receive a message on the printer, or if you have print quality problems.
●Imaging drum information
●Remove and replace the imaging drums
Imaging drum information
This printer indicates when an imaging drum level is low and very low. The actual imaging drum life remaining
can vary. Consider having a replacement imaging drum available to install when print quality is no longer
acceptable.
To purchase imaging drums or check imaging drum compatibility for the printer, go to HP SureSupply at
www.hp.com/go/suresupply. Scroll to the bottom of the page and verify that the country/region is correct.
The printer uses four imaging drums installed next to each toner cartridge. One universal imaging drum part ts
in all four positions. The imaging drums are inside the front door.
Table 3-9 Imaging drum information
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP Imaging Drum Replacement imaging drum 660A W2004A
Do not remove the imaging drum from its package until it is time to replace it.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the imaging drum, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover
the green imaging drum if it must be removed from the printer for an extended period of time. Do not touch the
imaging drum. Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-quality problems.
The following illustration shows the imaging drum components.
1
2
4
3
Number Description
1 Handle
2 Imaging drum
76 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
Number Description
3 Protective shield
4 Memory chip
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it o by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water
sets toner into fabric.
NOTE: Information about recycling used imaging drums is in the imaging drum box.
Remove and replace the imaging drums
Follow these steps to replace an imaging drum.
1. Open the front door.
ENWW Replace the imaging drums 77
2. Rotate the blue lever in front of the imaging drum
to the left.
3. Grasp the handle of the used imaging drum and
pull out to remove it.
78 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
4. Remove the new imaging drum from its packaging
by removing the end caps (callout 1), removing the
imaging drum from the plastic bag (callout 2), and
then removing the orange protective shield (callout
3).
NOTE: Avoid touching the green imaging drum.
Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print
defects.
2
1
3
5. Support the imaging drum underneath with one
hand while holding the handle with the other. Align
the imaging drum with its slot on the shelf, and
then insert the imaging drum into the printer.
NOTE: Avoid touching the green imaging drum.
Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print
defects.
ENWW Replace the imaging drums 79
6. Rotate the blue lever in front of the imaging drum
to the right.
7. Close the front door.
Save all packaging for recycling the used imaging
drum. To recycle the used imaging drum, follow the
instructions included with the new imaging drum.
80 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
Replace the toner-collection unit
Replace the toner-collection unit if you receive a message on the printer, or if you have print quality problems.
●Toner-collection unit information
●Remove and replace the toner-collection unit
Toner-collection unit information
Replace the toner-collection unit when the control panel prompts you.
Table 3-10 Toner-collection unit information
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP Toner Collection Unit Replacement toner-collection unit Not applicable 3WT90A
CAUTION: When the toner-collection unit reaches the end of its life, the printer will stop printing to avoid
damage to internal parts. You must replace the toner-collection unit to continue printing.
NOTE: The toner-collection unit is designed for a single use. Do not attempt to empty the toner-collection unit
and reuse it. Doing so could lead to toner being spilled inside the printer, which could result in reduced print
quality. After use, return the toner-collection unit to HP’s Planet Partners program for recycling.
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it o by using a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water
sets toner into fabric.
Remove and replace the toner-collection unit
Follow these steps to replace the toner-collection unit.
1. Open the front door.
ENWW Replace the toner-collection unit 81
2. Open the left door.
3. Grasp the front of the toner-collection unit and
remove it from the printer.
82 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
4. Remove the new toner-collection unit from its
packaging.
5. Install the new unit into the printer. Make sure the
toner-collection unit is rmly in place.
ENWW Replace the toner-collection unit 83
6. Close the left door.
NOTE: If the toner-collection unit is not installed
correctly, the left door does not close completely.
7. Close the front door.
Save all packaging for recycling the used toner-
collection unit. To recycle the used toner-collection
unit, follow the instructions included with the new
toner-collection unit.
84 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
Replace the staple cartridge (M776zs model only)
Install a new staple cartridge when your current cartridge is empty.
●Staple cartridge information
●Remove and replace the staple cartridge
Staple cartridge information
Replace the staple cartridge when the control panel prompts you.
Table 3-11 Staple cartridge information
Item Description Cartridge number Part number
HP Inner Finisher Staples Replacement staple cartridge Not applicable J8J96A
Remove and replace the staple cartridge
Follow these steps to replace the staple cartridge in the inner nisher accessory.
1. Open the inner nisher front door.
2. Grasp the colored tab on the staple cartridge
carriage, and then pull the staple cartridge carriage
straight out.
ENWW Replace the staple cartridge (M776zs model only) 85
3. Lift two tabs on the staple cartridge, and then lift
up to remove the empty staple cartridge from the
staple cartridge carriage assembly.
Do not discard the staple cartridge carriage. It must
be reused with the new staple cartridge.
4. Insert the new staple cartridge into the staple
cartridge carriage.
5. Reinstall the staple cartridge carriage into the
stapler by pressing the colored handle inward until
it snaps into place.
6. Close the inner nisher front door.
86 Chapter 3 Supplies, accessories, and parts ENWW
4 Print
Print using the software, or print from a mobile device or USB ash drive.
●Print tasks (Windows)
●Print tasks (macOS)
●Store print jobs on the printer to print later or print privately
●Mobile printing
●Print from a USB ash drive
●Print using high-speed USB 2.0 port (wired)
For video assistance, see www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
●Install and congure
●Learn and use
●Solve problems
●Download software and rmware updates
●Join support forums
●Find warranty and regulatory information
ENWW 87
Print tasks (Windows)
Learn about common printing tasks for Windows users.
●How to print (Windows)
●Automatically print on both sides (Windows)
●Manually print on both sides (Windows)
●Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows)
●Select the paper type (Windows)
●Additional print tasks
How to print (Windows)
Use the Print option from a software application to select the printer and basic options for your print job.
The following procedure describes the basic printing process for Windows.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers. To change settings, click the Properties or Preferences button to
open the print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
●Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
●Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL-6 V4 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
NOTE: For more information, click the Help (?) button in the print driver.
3. Click the tabs in the print driver to congure the available options. For example, set the paper orientation
on the Finishing tab, and set the paper source, paper type, paper size, and quality settings on the Paper/
Quality tab.
4. Click the OK button to return to the Print dialog box. Select the number of copies to print from this screen.
5. Click the Print button to print the job.
Automatically print on both sides (Windows)
If your printer has an automatic duplexer installed, you can automatically print on both sides of the paper. Use a
paper size and type supported by the duplexer.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
88 Chapter 4 Print ENWW
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
●Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
●Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL-6 V4 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
3. Click the Finishing tab.
4. Select Print on both sides. Click OK to close the Document Properties dialog.
5. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.
Manually print on both sides (Windows)
Use this procedure for printers that do not have an automatic duplexer installed or to print on paper that the
duplexer does not support.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
●Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
●Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL-6 V4 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
3. Click the Finishing tab.
4. Select Print on both sides (manually), and then click OK to close the Document Properties dialog.
5. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the rst side of the job.
6. Retrieve the printed stack from the output bin, and place it in Tray 1.
7. If prompted, select the appropriate control panel button to continue.
Print multiple pages per sheet (Windows)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can select an option to print multiple
pages on a single sheet of paper. For example, you might want to do this if you are printing a very large
document and want to save paper.
ENWW Print tasks (Windows) 89
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
●Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
●Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL-6 V4 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
3. Click the Finishing tab.
4. Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per sheet drop-down.
5. Select the correct Print page borders, Page order, and Orientation options. Click OK to close the Document
Properties dialog.
6. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.
Select the paper type (Windows)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can set the paper type you are using for
your print job. For example, if your default paper type is Letter, but you are using a dierent paper type for a print
job, select that specic paper type.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then click the Properties or Preferences button to open the
print driver.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
●Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
●Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL-6 V4 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. Select the paper type from the Paper type drop-down list.
5. Click OK to close the Document Properties dialog. In the Print dialog, click Print to print the job.
If the tray needs to be congured, a tray conguration message displays on the printer control panel.
90 Chapter 4 Print ENWW
6. Load the tray with the specied type and size of paper, and then close the tray.
7. Touch the OK button to accept the detected type and size, or touch the Modify button to choose a dierent
paper size or type.
8. Select the correct type and size, and then touch the OK button.
Additional print tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common printing tasks.
Go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP.
Instructions are available for print tasks, such as the following:
●Create and use printing shortcuts or presets
●Select the paper size, or use a custom paper size
●Select the page orientation
●Create a booklet
●Scale a document to t a specic paper size
●Print the rst or last pages of the document on dierent paper
●Print watermarks on a document
ENWW Print tasks (Windows) 91
Print tasks (macOS)
Print using the HP printing software for macOS, including how to print on both sides or print multiple pages per
sheet.
●How to print (macOS)
●Automatically print on both sides (macOS)
●Manually print on both sides (macOS)
●Print multiple pages per sheet (macOS)
●Select the paper type (macOS)
●Additional print tasks
How to print (macOS)
Use the Print option from a software application to select the printer and basic options for your print job.
The following procedure describes the basic printing process for macOS.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then select other menus to adjust the print settings.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for dierent software programs.
4. Click the Print button.
Automatically print on both sides (macOS)
If your printer has an automatic duplexer installed, you can automatically print on both sides of the paper. Use a
paper size and type supported by the duplexer.
NOTE: This information applies to printers that include an automatic duplexer.
NOTE: This feature is available if you install the HP print driver. It might not be available if you are using
AirPrint®.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Layout menu.
macOS 10.14 Mojave and later: Click Show Details, click Two-Sided, and then click the Layout menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for dierent software programs.
4. Select a binding option from the Two-Sided drop-down list.
5. Click the Print button.
92 Chapter 4 Print ENWW
Manually print on both sides (macOS)
Use this procedure for printers that do not have an automatic duplexer installed or to print on paper that the
duplexer does not support.
NOTE: This feature is available if you install the HP print driver. It might not be available if you are using AirPrint.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Manual Duplex menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for dierent software programs.
4. Click the Manual Duplex box, and select a binding option.
5. Click the Print button.
6. Go to the printer and remove any blank paper that is in Tray 1.
7. Retrieve the printed stack from the output bin and place it with the printed-side facing down in the input
tray.
8. If prompted, touch the appropriate control panel button to continue.
Print multiple pages per sheet (macOS)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can select an option to print multiple
pages on a single sheet of paper. For example, you might want to do this if you are printing a very large
document and want to save paper.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Layout menu.
NOTE: The name of the item varies for dierent software programs.
4. From the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet.
5. In the Layout Direction area, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.
6. From the Borders menu, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.
7. Click the Print button.
Select the paper type (macOS)
When you print from a software application using the Print option, you can set the paper type you are using for
your print job. For example, if your default paper type is Letter, but you are using a dierent paper type for a print
job, select that specic paper type.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. Select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Media & Quality menu or the Paper/Quality menu.
ENWW Print tasks (macOS) 93
NOTE: The name of the item varies for dierent software programs.
4. Select from the Media & Quality or Paper/Quality options.
NOTE: This list contains the master set of options available. Some options are not available on all printers.
●Media Type: Select the option for the type of paper for the print job.
●Print Quality or Quality: Select the resolution level for the print job.
●Edge-To-Edge Printing: Select this option to print close to the paper edges.
5. Click the Print button.
Additional print tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common printing tasks.
Go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP.
Instructions are available for print tasks, such as the following:
●Create and use printing shortcuts or presets
●Select the paper size, or use a custom paper size
●Select the page orientation
●Create a booklet
●Scale a document to t a specic paper size
●Print the rst or last pages of the document on dierent paper
●Print watermarks on a document
94 Chapter 4 Print ENWW
Store print jobs on the printer to print later or print privately
Store print jobs in the printer memory for printing at a later time.
●Introduction
●Create a stored job (Windows)
●Create a stored job (macOS)
●Print a stored job
●Delete a stored job
●Information sent to printer for Job Accounting purposes
Introduction
The following information provides procedures for creating and printing documents that are stored on the USB
ash drive. These jobs can be printed at a later time or printed privately.
Create a stored job (Windows)
Store jobs on the USB ash drive for private or delayed printing.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer from the list of printers, and then select Properties or Preferences.
NOTE: The name of the button varies for dierent software programs.
In Windows 10, 8.1, and 8, these applications will have a dierent layout with dierent features from what
is described below for desktop applications. To access the print feature from a Start screen app, complete
the following steps:
●Windows 10: Select Print, and then select the printer.
●Windows 8.1 or 8: Select Devices, select Print, and then select the printer.
For the HP PCL-6 V4 driver, the HP AiO Printer Remote application downloads additional driver features
when More settings is selected.
3. Click the Job Storage tab.
4. Select a Job Storage Mode option:
●Proof and Hold: Print and proof one copy of a job, and then print more copies.
●Personal Job: The job does not print until you request it at the printer control panel. For this job-
storage mode, you can select one of the Make Job Private/Secure options. If you assign a personal
identication number (PIN) to the job, you must provide the required PIN at the control panel. If you
encrypt the job, you must provide the required password at the control panel. The print job is deleted
from memory after it prints and is lost if the printer loses power.
ENWW Store print jobs on the printer to print later or print privately 95
●Quick Copy: Print the requested number of copies of a job and store a copy of the job in the printer
memory so you can print it again later.
●Stored Job: Store a job on the printer and allow other users to print the job at any time. For this job-
storage mode, you can select one of the Make Job Private/Secure options. If you assign a personal
identication number (PIN) to the job, the person who prints the job must provide the required PIN at
the control panel. If you encrypt the job, the person who prints the job must provide the required
password at the control panel.
5. To use a custom user name or job name, click the Custom button, and then enter the user name or the job
name.
Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name:
●Use Job Name + (1-99): Append a unique number to the end of the job name.
●Replace Existing File: Overwrite the existing stored job with the new one.
6. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the Print
button to print the job.
Create a stored job (macOS)
Store jobs on the USB ash drive for private or delayed printing.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.
3. Click Show Details or Copies & Pages, and then click the Job Storage menu.
NOTE: If the Job Storage menu is not showing, follow the instructions in the "Disable or enable job storage
feature" section to activate the menu.
4. In the Mode drop-down list, select the type of stored job.
●Proof and Hold: Print and proof one copy of a job, and then print more copies. The rst copy prints
immediately. Printing of the subsequent copies must be initiated from the device's front control panel.
For example, if 10 copies are sent, one copy prints immediately, and the other nine copies will print
when the job is retrieved. The job is deleted after all copies are printed.
●Personal Job: The job does not print until someone requests it at the printer control panel. If the job
has a personal identication number (PIN), provide the required PIN at the control panel. The print job
is deleted from memory after it prints.
●Quick Copy: Print the requested number of copies of a job and store a copy of the job in the printer
memory to print it again later. The job is deleted manually or by the job retention schedule.
●Stored Job: Store a job on the printer and allow other users to print the job at any time. If the job has a
personal identication number (PIN), the person who prints the job must provide the required PIN at
the control panel. The job is deleted manually or by the job retention schedule.
5. To use a custom user name or job name, click the Custom button, and then enter the user name or the job
name.
NOTE: macOS 10.14 Mojave and later: The print driver no longer includes the Custom button. Use the
options below the Mode drop-down list to set up the saved job.
96 Chapter 4 Print ENWW
Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name.
●Use Job Name + (1-99): Append a unique number to the end of the job name.
●Replace Existing File: Overwrite the existing stored job with the new one.
6. If you selected the Stored Job or Personal Job option in the Mode drop-down list, you can protect the job
with a PIN. Type a 4-digit number in the Use PIN to Print eld. When other people attempt to print this job,
the printer prompts them to enter this PIN.
7. Click the Print button to process the job.
Print a stored job
Use the following procedure to print a job that is stored in the printer memory.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, and then select the
Print icon.
2. Select Print from Job Storage.
3. Select Choose, and then select the name of the folder where the job is stored.
4. Select the name of the job. If the job is private or encrypted, enter the PIN or password.
5. To adjust the number of copies, select the number of copies eld. Use the keypad to enter the number of
copies to print.
6. Select Start or Print to print the job.
ENWW Store print jobs on the printer to print later or print privately 97
Delete a stored job
You can delete documents that have been saved to the printer when they are no longer needed. You can also
adjust the maximum number of jobs for the printer to store.
●Delete a job that is stored on the printer
●Change the job storage limit
Delete a job that is stored on the printer
Use the control panel to delete a job that is stored in the printer memory.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, and then select the
Print icon.
2. Select Print from Job Storage.
3. Select Choose, and then select the name of the folder where the job is stored.
4. Select the name of the job. If the job is private or encrypted, enter the PIN or password.
5. Select the Trash button to delete the job.
Change the job storage limit
When a new job is stored in the printer memory, the printer overwrites any previous jobs with the same user and
job name. If a job is not already stored under the same user and job name, and the printer needs additional
space, the printer might delete other stored jobs starting with the oldest.
To change the number of jobs that the printer can store, complete the following procedure:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Manage Stored Jobs
c. Temporary Job Storage Limit
3. Use the keypad to enter the number of jobs that the printer stores.
4. Select OK or Done to save the setting.
Information sent to printer for Job Accounting purposes
Printing jobs sent from drivers on the client (e.g., PC) may send personally identiable information to HP’s
Printing and Imaging devices. This information may include, but is not limited to, user name and client name
from which the job originated that may be used for job accounting purposes, as determined by the Administrator
of the printing device. This same information may also be stored with the job on the mass storage device (e.g.,
disk drive) of the printing device when using the job storage feature.
98 Chapter 4 Print ENWW
Mobile printing
Mobile and ePrint solutions enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet, smartphone, or other
mobile device.
●Introduction
●Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct Print, NFC, and BLE printing
●HP ePrint via email
●AirPrint
●Android embedded printing
Introduction
HP oers multiple mobile printing solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop, tablet,
smartphone, or other mobile device.
To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to www.hp.com/go/LaserJetMobilePrinting.
ENWW Mobile printing 99
Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct Print, NFC, and BLE printing
HP provides Wi-Fi Direct Print, Near Field Communication (NFC), and Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) printing for
printers with a supported HP Jetdirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless Accessory. This accessory is available as an
option for HP printers that include a hardware-integration pocket (HIP).
●Enable wireless printing
●Change the Wi-Fi Direct name
These features enable Wi-Fi capable (mobile) devices to make a wireless network connection directly to the
printer without using a wireless router.
The printer does not need to be connected to the network for this mobile walk-up printing to work.
Use Wi-Fi Direct Print to print wirelessly from the following devices:
●iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch using Apple AirPrint
●Android mobile devices using the Android embedded print solution
For more information on wireless printing, go to www.hp.com/go/LaserJetMobilePrinting.
NFC, BLE, and Wi-Fi Direct Print capabilities can be enabled or disabled from the printer control panel.
Enable wireless printing
To print wirelessly from mobile devices, Wi-Fi Direct must be turned on.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
2. Select the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Wi-Fi Direct
c. Status
3. Select On, and then select OK to enable wireless printing.
Change the Wi-Fi Direct name
Change the printer Wi-Fi Direct name using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
NOTE: In environments where more than one model of the same printer is installed, it might be helpful to
provide each printer a unique Wi-Fi Direct Name for easier printer identication for HP Wi-Fi Direct printing. The
Wireless network names, e.g., Wireless, Wi-Fi Direct, etc. are available on the Information screen by selecting the
Information icon , and then selecting the Wi-Fi Direct icon .
Complete the following procedure to change the printer Wi-Fi Direct name:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
100 Chapter 4 Print ENWW
a. Networking
b. Wi-Fi Direct
c. Wi-Fi Direct Name
3. Use the keypad to change the name in the Wi-Fi Direct Name text eld, and then select OK.
HP ePrint via email
Use HP ePrint via email to print documents by sending them as an email attachment to the printer's email
address from any email enabled device.
To use HP ePrint via email, the printer must meet these requirements:
●The printer must be connected to a wired or wireless network and have Internet access.
●HP Web Services must be enabled on the printer, and the printer must be registered with HP Connected.
Follow this procedure to enable HP Web Services and register with HP Connected:
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. From a computer on the same network as the printer, open a web browser. In the address line, type
the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key
on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Click the HP Web Services tab.
3. Select the option to enable Web Services.
NOTE: Enabling Web Services might take several minutes.
4. Go to www.hpconnected.com to create an HP ePrint account and complete the setup process.
AirPrint
Direct printing using Apple’s AirPrint is supported for iOS and from Mac computers running macOS 10.7 Lion and
newer.
Use AirPrint to print directly to the printer from an iPad, iPhone (3GS or later), or iPod touch (third generation or
later) in the following mobile applications:
●Mail
●Photos
●Safari
ENWW Mobile printing 101
●iBooks
●Select third-party applications
To use AirPrint, the printer must be connected to the same network (sub-net) as the Apple device. For more
information about using AirPrint and about which HP printers are compatible with AirPrint, go to
www.hp.com/go/MobilePrinting.
NOTE: Before using AirPrint with a USB connection, verify the version number. AirPrint versions 1.3 and earlier
do not support USB connections.
Android embedded printing
HP's built-in print solution for Android and Kindle enables mobile devices to automatically nd and print to HP
printers that are either on a network or within wireless range for Wi-Fi Direct printing.
The print solution is built into many versions of the operating system.
NOTE: If printing is not available on your device, go to the Google Play > Android apps and install the HP Print
Service Plugin.
For more information on how to use Android embedded printing and which Android devices are supported, go to
www.hp.com/go/MobilePrinting.
102 Chapter 4 Print ENWW
Print from a USB ash drive
This printer features easy-access USB printing to print les without a computer.
●Enable the USB port for printing
●Print USB documents
The printer accepts standard USB ash drives in the USB port near the control panel. It supports the following
types of les:
●.pdf
●.prn
●.pcl
●.ps
●.cht
ENWW Print from a USB ash drive 103
Enable the USB port for printing
The USB port is disabled by default. Before using this feature, enable the USB port.
●Method one: Enable the USB port from the printer control panel
●Method two: Enable the USB port from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected printers only)
Use one of the following methods to enable the port:
Method one: Enable the USB port from the printer control panel
Use the printer control panel to enable the USB port for printing.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Enable Device USB
3. Select Enable Print from USB Drive.
Method two: Enable the USB port from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected printers
only)
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to enable the USB port for printing.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address exactly as it displays on the printer control
panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
3. Select the Copy/Print tab for MFP models or the Print tab for SFP models.
4. In the left menu, select Print from USB Drive Settings.
5. Select Enable Print from USB Drive.
6. Click Apply.
Print USB documents
Print documents from a USB ash drive.
1. Insert the USB ash drive into the easy-access USB port.
104 Chapter 4 Print ENWW
NOTE: The port might be covered. For some printers, the cover ips open. For other printers, pull the
cover straight out to remove it.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, and then select the
Print icon.
3. Select Print from USB Drive.
4. Select Choose, select the name of the document to print, and then select Select.
NOTE: The document might be in a folder. Open folders as necessary.
5. To adjust the number of copies, touch the box to the left of the Print button, and then select the number of
copies from the keypad that opens. To close the keypad, select the Close button .
6. Select Print to print the document.
ENWW Print from a USB ash drive 105
Print using high-speed USB 2.0 port (wired)
Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port for wired USB printing. The port is located in the interface ports area and is
disabled by default.
●Method one: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the printer control panel menus
●Method two: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected
printers only)
Use one of the following methods to enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port. Once the port is enabled, install the
product software in order to print using this port.
Method one: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the printer control panel menus
Use the control panel to enable the port.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Enable Device USB
3. Select the Enabled option.
Method two: Enable the high-speed USB 2.0 port from the HP Embedded Web Server
(network-connected printers only)
Use the HP EWS to enable the port.
1. Find the printer IP address. On the printer control panel, select the Information button , and then select
the Network icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address exactly as it displays on the printer control
panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
3. Select the Security tab.
4. On the left side of the screen, select General Security.
5. Scroll down to the Hardware Ports and select the following check boxes:
a. Enable Device USB
b. Enable Host USB plug and play
6. Click Apply.
106 Chapter 4 Print ENWW
5 Copy
Make copies with the printer, learn how to copy a two-sided document, and locate additional copy tasks on the
web.
●Make a copy
●Copy on both sides (duplex)
●Additional copy tasks
For video assistance, see www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
●Install and congure
●Learn and use
●Solve problems
●Download software and rmware updates
●Join support forums
●Find warranty and regulatory information
Make a copy
Copy a document or picture from the scanner glass or automatic document feeder.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
3. To select the number of copies, touch the box next to Copy, use the keypad to enter the number of copies,
and then touch the close keypad button.
4. Select Optimize Text/Picture to optimize for the type of image being copied: text, graphics, or photos.
Select one of the predened options.
ENWW 107
5. Set options marked with a yellow triangle before using the preview feature.
NOTE: After the preview scan, these options are removed from the main Options list and are summarized
in the Pre-scan Options list. To change any of these options, discard the preview and start over.
Using the preview feature is optional.
6. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons on the
right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.
Table 5-1 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
108 Chapter 5 Copy ENWW
Table 5-1 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, touch Copy to begin copying.
Copy on both sides (duplex)
Copy or print on both sides of the paper.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
3. In the Options pane, select Original Side, and then select the option that describes the original document:
●Use Automatically detect to detect whether the original is printed on one or both sides of the page.
●Use 1-sided for originals that are printed on one side of the page.
●Use 2-sided (book-style) for originals that ip on the right/left edge of the page, like books. If the
image is portrait, the output ips on the long edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the output
ips on the short edge of the page.
●Use 2-sided (ip-style) for originals that ip on the top/bottom edge of the page, like calendars. If the
image is portrait, the output ips on the short edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the output
ips on the long edge of the page.
4. Select Output Sides, and then select one of these options:
●Match original: The output will match the format of the original. For example, if the original is 1-sided,
the output will be 1-sided. However, if the administrator has restricted 1-sided printing and the
original is 1-sided, the output will be 2-sided book-style.
●1-sided: The output will be 1-sided. However, if the administrator has restricted 1-sided printing, the
output will be 2-sided book-style.
●2-sided (book-style): The output will ip on the right/left edge of the page, like a book. If the image is
portrait, the output ips on the long edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the output ips on
the short edge of the page.
●2-sided (ip-style): The output will ip on the top/bottom edge of the page, like a calendar. If the
image is portrait, the output ips on the short edge of the page. If the image is landscape, the output
ips on the long edge of the page.
5. Set options marked with a yellow triangle before using the preview feature.
ENWW Copy on both sides (duplex) 109
NOTE: After the preview scan, these options are removed from the main Options list and are summarized
in the Pre-scan Options list. To change any of these options, discard the preview and start over.
Using the preview feature is optional.
6. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons on the
right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.
Table 5-2 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
110 Chapter 5 Copy ENWW
Table 5-2 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, touch Start to begin copying.
Additional copy tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common copy tasks.
Go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP.
Instructions are available for copy tasks, such as the following:
●Copy or scan pages from books or other bound documents
●Copy mixed-size documents
●Copy or scan both sides of an identication card
●Copy or scan a document into a booklet format
ENWW Additional copy tasks 111
112 Chapter 5 Copy ENWW
6 Scan
Scan using the software, or scan directly to email, a USB ash drive, a network folder, or another destination.
●Set up Scan to Email
●Set up Scan to Network Folder
●Set up Scan to SharePoint
●Set up Scan to USB Drive
●Scan to email
●Scan to job storage
●Scan to network folder
●Scan to SharePoint
●Scan to USB drive
●Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions
●Additional scan tasks
For video assistance, see www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
●Install and congure
●Learn and use
●Solve problems
●Download software and rmware updates
●Join support forums
●Find warranty and regulatory information
ENWW 113
Set up Scan to Email
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and send it to one or more email addresses.
●Introduction
●Before you begin
●Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
●Step two: Congure the Network Identication settings
●Step three: Congure the Send to Email feature
●Step four: Congure the Quick Sets (optional)
●Step ve: Set up Send to Email to use Oice 365 Outlook (optional)
Introduction
To use this scan feature, the printer must be connected to a network; however, the feature is not available until it
has been congured. There are two methods for conguring Scan to Email, the Scan to Email Setup Wizard for
basic and Email Setup for advanced.
Use the following information to set up the Scan to Email feature.
Before you begin
To set up the Scan to Email feature, the printer must have an active network connection.
Administrators need the following information before beginning the conguration process.
●Administrative access to the printer
●DNS suix (e.g., companyname.com)
●SMTP server (e.g., smtp.mycompany.com)
NOTE: If you do not know the SMTP server name, SMTP port number, or authentication information,
contact the email/Internet service provider or system administrator for the information. SMTP server
names and port names are typically found by doing an Internet search. For example, use terms like "Gmail
smtp server name" or "Yahoo smtp server name" to search.
●SMTP server authentication requirements for outgoing email messages, including the user name and
password used for authentication, if applicable.
NOTE: Consult your email service provider's documentation for information on digital sending limits for your
email account. Some providers may temporarily lock your account if you exceed your sending limit.
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
114 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the
printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
Step two: Congure the Network Identication settings
Congure advanced setting for network identication.
NOTE: Conguring email setup on the Networking tab is an advanced process and might require the assistance
of a system administrator.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Networking.
NOTE: For conguring the network settings for use with Oice 365, Step ve: Set up Send to Email to use
Oice 365 Outlook (optional) on page 127
2. In the left navigation pane, click TCP/IP Settings. A username/password might be required to access the
Network Identication tab of the EWS.
3. On the TCP/IP Settings dialog, click the Network Identication tab.
ENWW Set up Scan to Email 115
4. If DNS is required on the network, in the TCP/IP Domain Suix area, verify that the DNS suix for the email
client being used is listed. DNS suixes have this format: companyname.com, gmail.com, etc.
NOTE: If the Domain Name suix is not set up, use the IP address.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.
116 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Step three: Congure the Send to Email feature
The two options for conguring Send to Email are the Email Setup Wizard for basic conguration and Email
Setup for advanced conguration. Use the following options to congure the Send to Email feature:
●Method one: Basic conguration using the Email Setup Wizard
●Method two: Advanced conguration using the Email Setup
Method one: Basic conguration using the Email Setup Wizard
Peform basic conguration using the Email Setup Wizard.
This option opens the Email Setup Wizard in the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) for basic conguration.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards.
3. In the Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards dialog, click the Email Setup link.
NOTE: If a message displays indicating that the Scan to Email feature is disabled, click Continue to
proceed with the conguration and enable the Scan to Email feature upon completion.
4. On the Congure Email Servers (SMTP) dialog, select one of the following options and complete the steps:
●Option one: Use a server already in use by Email.
Select Use a server already in use by Email, and then click Next.
●Option two: Search the network for the outgoing email server.
This option nds outgoing SMTP servers inside your rewall only.
ENWW Set up Scan to Email 117
1. Select Search network for outgoing email server, and then click Next.
2. Select the appropriate server from the Congure Email Server (SMTP) list, and then click Next.
3. Select the option that describes the server’s authentication requirements:
○Server does not require authentication: Select Server does not require authentication, and
then click Next.
-OR-
○Server requires authentication: From the drop-down list, select an authentication option:
●Select Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel, and then
click Next.
-OR-
●Select Always use these credentials, enter the User name and Password, and then
click Next.
●Option three: Add the SMTP server.
1. Select Add SMTP server.
2. Enter the Server Name and Port Number, and then click Next.
NOTE: In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed.
NOTE: If you are using a hosted SMTP service such as Gmail, verify the SMTP address, port
number, and SSL settings from the service provider’s website or other sources. Typically, for
Gmail, the SMTP address is smtp.gmail.com, port number 465, and the SSL should be enabled.
Please refer to online sources to conrm these server settings are current and valid at the time
of conguration.
3. Select the appropriate server authentication option:
○Server does not require authentication: Select Server does not require authentication, and
then click Next.
-OR-
○Server requires authentication: Select an option from the Server requires authentication
drop-down list:
●Select Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel, and then
click Next.
-OR-
●Select Always use these credentials, enter the User name and Password, and then
click Next.
5. On the Congure Email Settings dialog, enter the following information about the sender’s email address,
and then click Next.
NOTE: When setting up the From, Subject, and Message elds, if the User editable check box is
unchecked, users will not be able to edit those elds at the printer control panel when sending an email.
118 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Table 6-1 Send email settings
Option Description
From
(Required)
Select one of the following options from the From drop-down list:
●User’s address (sign-in required)
●Default From: Enter a default email address and display name in the Default From Email
Address and Default Display Name elds
NOTE: Create an email account for the printer, and use this address for the default
email address.
NOTE: Congure the email feature so that users must sign in before using it. This
prevents users from sending an email from an address that is not their own.
Subject
(Optional)
Provide a default subject line for the email messages.
Message
(Optional)
Create a custom message.
To use this message for all emails sent from the printer, clear the User editable check box for
Message.
6. In the Congure File Scan Settings area, set the default scanning preferences, and then click Next.
Table 6-2 Scan settings
Option Description
File Type Select the default le type for the scanned document:
●PDF
●JPEG
●TIFF
●MTIFF
●XPS
●PDF/A
HP LaserJet Enterprise Flow MFP printers or MFP printers that are connected to a digital send
software (DSS) server also support the following OCR le types:
●Text (OCR)
●Unicode Text (OCR)
●RTF (OCR)
●Searchable PDF (OCR)
●Searchable PDF/A (OCR)
●HTML (OCR)
●CSV (OCR)
ENWW Set up Scan to Email 119
Table 6-2 Scan settings (continued)
Option Description
Color/Black Select the default color setting for the scanned document:
●Color
●Black
●Black/Gray
●Automatically detect
Quality and File Size Select the default output quality for the scanned document:
●Low (small le)
●Medium
●High (large le)
Resolution Select the default scan resolution for the scanned document:
●75 dpi
●150 dpi
●200 dpi
●300 dpi
●400 dpi
●600 dpi
7. Review the Summary area, and then click Finish to complete the setup.
Method two: Advanced conguration using the Email Setup
Perform advanced Email Setup using the embedded web server (EWS).
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send, and then click Email Setup in the left navigation
pane.
NOTE: By default, the Email Setup page displays the basic settings for Scan to Email setup. To access
additional settings, click the Advanced Settings button at the bottom of the page.
120 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
2. On the Email Setup dialog, select the Enable Send to Email check box. If this check box is not selected, the
feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.
3. In the Outgoing Email Servers (SMTP) area, complete the steps for one of the following options:
●Select one of the displayed servers.
●Click Add to start the SMTP wizard.
1. In the SMTP wizard, select one of the following options:
○Option one: If you know the SMTP server address or host name, enter the information, and
then click Next.
○Option two: If you do not know the address of the SMTP server, select Search network for
outgoing email server, and then click Next. Select the server, and then click Next.
NOTE: If an SMTP server was already created for another printer function, the Use a server
already in use by another function option displays. Select this option, and then congure it to be
used for the email function.
2. On the Set the basic information necessary to connect to the server dialog, set the options to
use, and then click Next.
ENWW Set up Scan to Email 121
NOTE:
○Some servers have problems sending or receiving emails that are larger than 5 megabytes
(MB). These problems can be prevented by entering a number in Split emails if larger than
(MB).
○In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed. However, when
using the Enable SMTP SSL Protocol option, port 587 must be used.
○If you are using Google™ Gmail for email service, select the Enable SMTP SSL Protocol
check box. Typically, for Gmail, the SMTP address is smtp.gmail.com, port number 465,
and the SSL should be enabled.
Please refer to online sources to conrm these server settings are current and valid at the
time of conguration.
3. On the Server Authentication Requirements dialog, select the option that describes the server’s
authentication requirements:
○Server does not require authentication, and then click Next.
○Server requires authentication:
○From the drop-down box, select Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at
the control panel, and then click Next.
○From the drop-down box, select Always use these credentials, enter the Username
and Password, and then click Next.
NOTE: If using a signed-in user's credentials, set email to require sign-in by the user on the
printer control panel. Deny device guest access to email by clearing the check box for email in
the Device Guest column in the Sign in and Permission Policies area on the Access Control dialog
of the Security tab. The icon in the check box changes from a check mark to a lock.
4. On the Server Usage dialog, choose the printer functions that will send email through this SMTP
server, and then click Next.
NOTE: If the server requires authentication, a user name and password for sending automatic
alerts and reports from the printer will be required.
5. On the Summary and Test dialog, enter a valid email address in the Send a test email to: eld,
and then click Test.
6. Verify that all of the settings are correct, and then click Finish to complete the outgoing email
server setup.
4. In the Address and Message Field Control area, enter a From: setting and any of the other optional settings.
122 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Table 6-3 Address and Message Field Control settings
Feature Description
Address Field Restrictions1Specify whether users must select an email address from an address book or whether users are
allowed to enter in an email address manually.
CAUTION: If Users must select from address book is selected, and any of the address elds are
also set as User editable, changes to those editable elds also change the corresponding values in
the address book.
To prevent users from changing contacts in the Address Book at the printer control panel, go to
the Access Control page on the Security tab, and deny Device Guest access to address book
modications.
Allow invalid email address
formats1
Select to allow an invalid email address format.
User editable To use the Default From address and Default Display Name for all emails sent from this printer
(unless a user is signed in), do not select the User editable check box.
When setting up the address elds, if the User editable check box is unchecked, users will not be
able to edit those elds at the printer control panel when sending an email. For send-to-me
functionality, clear the User editable check boxes for all of the address elds, including the From:,
To:, CC:, and BCC: elds, and then set that user's send email From: their own email address and To:
their own email address.
Default From: and Default
Display Name:
Provide an email address and name to use for the From: address for the email message.
NOTE: Create an email account for the printer, and use this address for the default email
address.
NOTE: Congure the email feature so that users must sign in before using it. This prevents users
from sending an email from an address that is not their own.
To:1Provide a To (recipient) email address for emails.
CC:1Provide a CC email address for emails.
BCC:1Provide a BCC email address for emails.
Subject: Provide a default subject line for the email messages.
Message: Create a custom message. To use this message for all emails sent from the printer, clear or do not
select the User editable check box for Message:.
1This setting is available only on the Advanced Settings page.
5. In the Signing and Encryption area, set the signing and encryption preferences.
NOTE: These settings are available only on the Advanced Settings page.
Table 6-4 Signing and Encryption settings
Feature Description
Signing Select whether to sign the security certicate.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
Hashing Algorithm Select the algorithm to use for signing the certicate.
Encryption Select whether to encrypt the email.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
Encryption Algorithm Select the algorithm to use for encrypting the email.
ENWW Set up Scan to Email 123
Table 6-4 Signing and Encryption settings (continued)
Feature Description
Attribute for Recipient Public
Key
Enter which attribute to use to retrieve the recipient’s public key certicate from LDAP.
Use the recipient public key
certicate to verify the
recipient
Select this setting to use the recipient’s public key certicate to verify the recipient.
6. In the Notication Settings area, select when users will receive notications about sent emails. The default
setting is using the signed-in user's email address. If the recipient email address is blank, no notication is
sent.
7. In the Scan Settings area, set the default scanning preferences.
NOTE: These settings are available only on the Advanced Settings page.
Table 6-5 Scan settings
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or
millimeters, for the front side and back side of a job.
8. In the File Settings area, set the default le settings preferences.
Table 6-6 File settings
Feature Description
File Name Prex1Set the default le name prex used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
File Name Suix1Set the default le name suix used for les saved to a network folder.
Duplicate le name suix default [lename]_YYYYMMDDT
File Name Preview1Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format1Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
124 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Table 6-6 File settings (continued)
Feature Description
Add numbering when job has
just one le (ex. _1–1)1
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one le instead of multiple
les.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
High Compression (smaller
le)1
Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size. However, the scanning
process for a High compression le might take longer than for a Normal compression le.
PDF encryption1If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A password must be specied
as part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The user will be
prompted to enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to pressing
start.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they
show more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the
le size is smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-quality
images, and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only.
Suppress blank pages1If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Create Multiple Files1Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a predetermined maximum number
of pages per le.
1This setting is available only on the Advanced Settings page.
9. Review the selected options to verify that they are accurate, and then click Apply to complete the setup.
Step four: Congure the Quick Sets (optional)
Congure Quick Sets for the printer. Quick Sets are optional shortcut jobs that can be accessed on the main
Home screen or within the Quick Sets application at the printer.
1. In the Email Setup area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets.
2. Select one of the following options:
●Select an existing Quick Set under Quick Sets Application in the table.
-OR-
●Click Add to start the Quick Set Wizard.
3. If you clicked Add, the Quick Sets Setup page opens. Complete the following information:
a. Quick Set Name: Enter a title for the new Quick Set.
b. Quick Set Description: Enter a description of the Quick Set.
c. Quick Set Start Option: To set how the Quick Set starts, click either Enter application, then user
presses Start or Start instantly when selected from the Home Screen.
ENWW Set up Scan to Email 125
4. Dene the following settings for the Quick Set: Address and Message Field Control, Signing and Encryption,
Notication Settings, Scan Settings, and File Settings.
5. Click Finish to save the Quick Set.
126 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Step ve: Set up Send to Email to use Oice 365 Outlook (optional)
Set up the Send to Email feature to send email from an Oice 365 Outlook account.
●Introduction
●Congure the outgoing email server (SMTP) to send an email from an Oice 365 Outlook account
Introduction
Microsoft Oice 365 Outlook is a cloud-based email system provided by Microsoft which uses Microsoft's Simple
Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server to send or receive emails. Complete the following to enable the printer to
send an email with an Oice 365 Outlook account from the control panel.
NOTE: You must have an email address account with Oice 365 Outlook to congure the settings in the EWS.
Congure the outgoing email server (SMTP) to send an email from an Oice 365 Outlook account
Congure the outgoing email server using the following procedure.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Networking.
2. In the left navigation pane, click TCP/IP Settings.
3. In the TCP/IP Settings area, click the Network Identication tab.
4. If DNS is required on the network, in the TCP/IP Domain Suix area, verify that the DNS suix for the email
client being used is listed. DNS suixes have this format: companyname.com, Gmail.com, etc.
NOTE: If the Domain Name suix is not set up, use the IP address.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.
ENWW Set up Scan to Email 127
7. On the left navigation pane, click Email Setup.
8. On the Email Setup page, select the Enable Scan to Email check box. If this check box is not available, the
feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.
9. In the Outgoing Email Servers (SMTP) area, click Add to start the SMTP wizard.
10. In the I know my SMTP server address or host name eld, type smtp.onoffice.com, and then click
Next.
11. On the Set the basic information necessary to connect to the server dialog, in the Port Number eld, type
587.
NOTE: Some servers have problems sending or receiving emails that are larger than 5 megabytes (MB).
These problems can be prevented by entering a number in Split emails if larger than (MB).
12. Select the Enable SMTP SSL Protocol check box, and then click Next.
13. On the Server Authentication Requirements dialog, complete the following information:
a. Select Server requires authentication.
b. From the drop-down list, select Always use these credentials.
c. In the Username eld, type the Oice 365 Outlook email address.
d. In the Password eld, type the Oice 365 Outlook account password, and then click Next.
14. On the Server Usage dialog, choose the printer functions that will send email through this SMTP server, and
then click the Next button.
15. On the Summary and Test dialog, enter a valid email address in the Send a test email to: eld, and then click
Test.
16. Verify that all of the settings are correct, and then click Finish to complete the outgoing email server setup.
128 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Set up Scan to Network Folder
Set up the Scan to Folder feature to scan documents directly to network folder.
●Introduction
●Before you begin
●Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
●Step two: Set up Scan to Network Folder
Introduction
This section explains how to enable and congure the Scan to Network Folder function. The printer has a feature
that enables it to scan a document and save it to a network folder. To use this scan feature, the printer must be
connected to a network; however, the feature is not available until it has been congured. There are two methods
for conguring Scan to Network Folder, the Save to Network Folder Setup Wizard for basic setup and Save to
Network Folder Setup for advanced setup.
Before you begin
Have the following items available before you set up the Scan to Network feature.
NOTE: To set up the Scan to Network Folder feature, the printer must have an active network connection.
Administrators need the following items before beginning the conguration process.
●Administrative access to the printer.
●The fully-qualied domain name (FQDN) (e.g., \\servername.us.companyname.net\scans) of the
destination folder OR the IP address of the server (e.g., \\16.88.20.20\scans).
NOTE: The use of the term "server" in this context refers to the computer where the shared folder resides.
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the
printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
ENWW Set up Scan to Network Folder 129
130 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Step two: Set up Scan to Network Folder
Set up Scan to Network Folder using one of the following methods.
●Method one: Use the Scan to Network Folder Wizard
●Method two: Use Scan to Network Folder Setup
Method one: Use the Scan to Network Folder Wizard
Use this option for basic conguration of the Save to Network Folder feature using the Scan to Network Folder
wizard.
NOTE: Before you begin: To display the printer's IP address or host name, touch the Information icon , and
then touch the Network icon on the printer's control panel.
1. Using the EWS top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send tab. The Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick
Setup Wizards dialog opens.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick Setup Wizards.
3. Click the Save to Network Folder Quick Set Wizard link.
4. On the Add or Remove a Save to Network Folder Quick Set dialog, click Add.
NOTE: Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the Quick
Sets application.
NOTE: The Save to Network Folder feature can be minimally congured without creating a quick set.
However, without the Quick Set, users must enter the destination folder information at the control panel for
each scan job. A quick set is required to include Save to Network Folder metadata.
5. On the Add Folder Quick Set dialog, complete the following information:
a. In the Quick Set Title eld, type a title.
NOTE: Name the Quick Set something that users can understand quickly (e.g., "Scan and save to a
folder").
b. In the Quick Set Description eld, type a description explaining what the Quick Set will save.
c. Click Next.
6. On the Congure Destination Folder dialog, complete the following information:
a. In the UNC Folder Path eld, type a folder path where the scan will go.
The folder path can either be the fully-qualied domain name (FQDN) or the IP address of the server.
Be sure that the folder path (e.g., \scans) follows the FQDN or IP address.
FQDN example: \\servername.us.companyname.net\scans
IP address example: \\16.88.20.20\scans
ENWW Set up Scan to Network Folder 131
NOTE: The FQDN can be more reliable than the IP address. If the server gets its IP address via DHCP,
the IP address can change. However, the connection with an IP address might be faster because the
printer does not need to use DNS to nd the destination server.
b. From the Authentication Settings drop-down, select one of the following options:
●Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel
●Always use these credentials
NOTE: If Always use these credentials is selected, a user name and password must be entered
in the corresponding elds, and the printer’s access to the folder must be veried by clicking
Verify Access.
c. In the Windows Domain eld, type the Windows domain.
TIP: To nd the Windows domain in Windows 7, click Start, click Control Panel, click System.
To nd the Windows domain in Windows 8, click Search, enter System in the search box, and then
click System.
The domain is listed under Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings.
d. Click Next.
7. On the Congure File Scan Settings dialog, set the default scanning preferences for the Quick Set, and then
click Next.
8. Review the Summary dialog, and then click Finish.
132 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Method two: Use Scan to Network Folder Setup
This option enables advanced conguration of the Save to Network Folder feature using the HP Embedded Web
Server (EWS) for the printer.
●Step one: Begin the conguration
●Step two: Congure the Scan to Network Folder settings
●Step three: Complete the conguration
NOTE: Before you begin: To display the printer's IP address or host name, touch the Information icon , and
then touch the Network icon on the printer's control panel.
Step one: Begin the conguration
Use the following steps to begin Scan to Network Folder setup.
1. Click the Scan/Digital Send tab.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Scan to Network Folder Setup.
ENWW Set up Scan to Network Folder 133
Step two: Congure the Scan to Network Folder settings
Use the following procedure to complete Scan to Network Folder setup.
●Step one: Begin the conguration
●Dialog one: Set the Quick Set name, description, and options for user interaction at the control panel
●Dialog two: Folder Settings
●Dialog three: Notication Settings
●Dialog four: Scan Settings
●Dialog ve: File Settings
●Dialog six: Summary
Step one: Begin the conguration
Use the following steps to begin conguration.
1. On the Scan to Network Folder Setup page, select the Enable Scan to Network Folder check box. If this box
is not selected, the feature is unavailable at the printer control panel.
2. In the Scan to Network Folder area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets. Click Add to open the Quick
Sets Setup dialog.
NOTE: Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the Quick
Sets application.
NOTE: The Scan to Network Folder feature can be minimally congured without creating a Quick Set.
However, without the Quick Set, users must enter the destination folder information at the control panel for
each scan job. A Quick Set is required to include Scan to Network Folder metadata.
Complete all of the settings in the Quick Set Setup to fully congure the Scan to Network Folder feature.
Dialog one: Set the Quick Set name, description, and options for user interaction at the control panel
Set the Quick Set details for user interaction at the printer's control panel.
Use the Set the button location for the Quick Set and options for user interaction at the control panel dialog to
congure where the Quick Set button will display on the printer control panel and to congure the level of user
interaction at the printer control panel.
1. In the Quick Set Name eld, type a title.
NOTE: Name the Quick Set something that users can understand quickly (e.g., "Scan and save to a
folder").
2. In the Quick Set Description eld, type a description explaining what the Quick Set will save.
3. From the Quick Set Start Option list, select one of the following options:
●Option one: Enter application, then user presses Start.
●Option two: Start instantly upon selection.
Select one of the following prompt options :
134 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
○Prompt for original sides
○Prompt for additional pages
○Require Preview
NOTE: If Start instantly upon selection is selected, the destination folder must be entered in the next
step.
4.Click Next.
ENWW Set up Scan to Network Folder 135
Dialog two: Folder Settings
Use the Folder Settings dialog to congure the types of folders the printer sends scanned documents to and the
folder permissions.
●Congure the destination folder for scanned documents
●Select the destination folder permissions
There are two types of destination folders to select from:
●Shared folders or FTP folders
●Personal shared folders
There are two types of folder permissions to select from:
●Read and write access
●Write access only
136 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Congure the destination folder for scanned documents
Select one of the following options to set up a destination folder.
●Option 1: Congure the printer to save to a shared folder or FTP folder
●Option 2: Congure the printer to save to a personal shared folder
Option 1: Congure the printer to save to a shared folder or FTP folder
To save scanned documents to a standard shared folder or an FTP folder, complete the following steps.
1. If it is not already selected, select Save to shared folders or FTP folders.
2. Click Add.... The Add Network Folder Path dialog opens.
3. On the Add Network Folder Path dialog, select one of the following options:
●Option one: Save to a standard shared network folder.
1. If it is not already selected, select Save to a standard shared network folder.
2. In the UNC Folder Path eld, type a folder path.
The folder path can either be the fully-qualied domain name (FQDN) or the IP address of the
server. Be sure that the folder path (e.g., \scans) follows the FQDN or IP address.
FQDN example: \\servername.us.companyname.net\scans
IP address example: \\16.88.20.20\scans
NOTE: The FQDN can be more reliable than the IP address. If the server gets its IP address via
DHCP, the IP address can change. However, the connection with an IP address might be faster
because the printer does not need to use DNS to nd the destination server.
3. To automatically create a subfolder for scanned documents in the destination folder, select a
format for the subfolder name from the Custom Subfolder list.
ENWW Set up Scan to Network Folder 137
To restrict the subfolder access to the user who creates the scan job, select Restrict subfolder
access to user.
4. To view the complete folder path for scanned documents, click Update Preview.
5. From the Authentication Settings list, select one of the following options:
○Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel
○Always use these credentials
NOTE: If Always use these credentials is selected, a user name and password must be entered
in the corresponding elds.
6. In the Windows Domain eld, type the Windows domain.
NOTE: To nd the Windows domain in Windows 7, click Start, click Control Panel, click System.
To nd the Windows domain in Windows 8, click Search, enter System in the search box, and
then click System.
The domain is listed under Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings.
NOTE: If a shared folder is set to be accessed by everyone, values for a workgroup name
(default is “Workgroup”), a user name, and password must be entered in the corresponding
elds. However, if the folder is within a particular user’s folders and not Public, the user name
and password of that user must be used.
NOTE: An IP address might be necessary instead of a computer name. Many home routers do
not handle computer names well, and there is no Domain Name Server (DNS). In this case, it is
best to set up a static IP address on the shared PC to alleviate the problem of DHCP assigning a
new IP address. On a typical home router, this is done by setting a static IP address that is on the
same subnet, but outside the DHCP address range.
7. Click OK.
●Option two: Save to an FTP Server.
138 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
NOTE: If an FTP site is outside the rewall, a proxy server must be specied under the network
settings. These settings are located in the EWS Networking tab, under the Advanced options.
1. Select Save to an FTP Server.
2. In the FTP Server eld, type the FTP server name or IP address.
3. In the Port eld, type the port number.
NOTE: In most cases, the default port number does not need to be changed.
4. To automatically create a subfolder for scanned documents in the destination folder, select a
format for the subfolder name from the Custom Subfolder list.
5. To view the complete folder path for scanned documents, click Update Preview.
6. From the FTP Transfer Mode list, select one of the following options:
○Passive
○Active
7. In the Username eld, type the user name.
8. In the Password eld, type the password.
9. Click Verify Access to conrm the destination can be accessed.
10. Click OK.
Option 2: Congure the printer to save to a personal shared folder
To save scanned documents to a personal shared folder, complete the following steps.
ENWW Set up Scan to Network Folder 139
NOTE: This option is used in domain environments where the administrator congures a shared folder for each
user. If the Save to a personal shared folder feature is congured, users will be required to sign in at the printer
control panel using Windows credentials or LDAP authentication.
1. Select Save to a personal shared folder.
2. In the Retrieve the device user’s home folder using this attribute eld, type the user’s home folder in the
Microsoft Active Directory.
NOTE: Verify that the user knows where this home folder is located on the network.
3. To add a user name subfolder at the end of the folder path, select Create subfolder based on user name.
To restrict the subfolder access to the user who creates the scan job, select Restrict subfolder access to
user.
140 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Select the destination folder permissions
Select one of the following options to set up destination folder permissions.
●Option 1: Congure read and write access
●Option 2: Congure write access only
Option 1: Congure read and write access
To send scanned documents to a folder congured for read and write access, complete the following steps.
NOTE: Send only to folders with read and write access supports folder verication and job notication.
1. If it is not already selected, select Send only to folders with read and write access.
2. To require the printer to verify folder access before starting a scan job, select Verify folder access prior to
job start.
NOTE: Scan jobs can complete more quickly if Verify folder access prior to job start is not selected;
however, if the folder is unavailable, the scan job will fail.
3. Click Next.
Option 2: Congure write access only
To send scanned documents to a folder congured for write access only, complete the following steps.
NOTE: Allow sending to folders with write access only does not support folder verication or job notication.
NOTE: If this option is selected, the printer cannot increment the scan lename. It sends the same lename for
all scans.
Select a time-related lename prex or suix for the scan lename, so that each scan is saved as a unique le,
and does not overwrite a previous le. This lename is determined by the information in the File Settings dialog
in the Quick Set Wizard.
1. Select Allow sending to folders with write access only.
2. Click Next.
Dialog three: Notication Settings
Use the Notication Settings dialog to congure when notications will be sent.
▲On the Notication Settings dialog, complete one of the following tasks:
●Option one: Do not notify.
1. Select Do not notify.
2. To prompt the user to review their notication settings, select Prompt user prior to job start, and
then click Next.
●Option two: Notify when job completes.
ENWW Set up Scan to Network Folder 141
1. Select Notify when job completes.
2. Select the method for delivering the notication from the Method Used to Deliver Notication
list.
If the method of notication selected is Email, type the email address in the Notication Email
Address eld.
3. To include a thumbnail of the rst scanned page in the notication, select Include Thumbnail.
4. To prompt the user to review their notication settings, select Prompt user prior to job start, and
then click Next.
●Option three: Notify only if job fails.
1. Select Notify only if job fails.
2. Select the method for delivering the notication from the Method Used to Deliver Notication
list.
If the method of notication selected is Email, type the email address in the Notication Email
Address eld.
3. To include a thumbnail of the rst scanned page in the notication, select Include Thumbnail.
4. To prompt the user to review their notication settings, select Prompt user prior to job start, and
then click Next.
Dialog four: Scan Settings
Complete the scan settings as follows.
On the Scan Settings dialog, set the default scanning preferences for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
Table 6-7 Scan settings
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or millimeters, for
the front side and back side of a job.
142 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Dialog ve: File Settings
Complete the le settings as follows.
On the File Settings dialog, set the default le settings for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
Table 6-8 File settings
Feature Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
File Name Suix Set the default le name suix used for les saved to a network folder.
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job has
just one le (ex. _1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one le instead of multiple les.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
High Compression (smaller le) Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size. However, the scanning
process for a High compression le might take longer than for a Normal compression le.
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A password must be specied as
part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The user will be prompted to
enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to starting the scan.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show
more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the le size is
smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-quality images,
and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only.
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Metadata File Format Use the drop-down list to select the le format for metadata information.
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a predetermined maximum number of
pages per le.
Dialog six: Summary
On the Summary dialog, review the Summary dialog, and then click Finish.
Step three: Complete the conguration
Use the following steps to complete Scan to Network Folder setup.
1. In the left navigation pane, click Scan to Network Folder.
2. On the Scan to Network Folder page, review the selected settings, and then click Apply to complete the
setup.
ENWW Set up Scan to Network Folder 143
Set up Scan to SharePoint
Use Scan to SharePoint to scan documents directly to a Microsoft SharePoint site. This feature eliminates the
need to scan the documents to a network folder, USB ash drive, or email message, and then manually upload
the les to the SharePoint site.
●Introduction
●Before you begin
●Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
●Step two: Enable Scan to SharePoint and create a Scan to SharePoint Quick Set
●Scan a le directly to a SharePoint site
●Quick Set scan settings and options for Scan to SharePoint
Introduction
Set up the Scan to SharePoint feature, and then scan documents directly to a SharePoint site.
Scan to SharePoint supports all scanning options, including the ability to scan documents as images or use the
OCR features to create text les or searchable PDFs.
The feature is disabled by default. Enable Save to Sharepoint in the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
NOTE: The Scan to Sharepoint feature is available only on workow-equipped printers.
Before you begin
Before this procedure can be completed, the destination folder that the scanned les will be saved to must exist
on the SharePoint site, and write access must be enabled to the destination folder. Scan to SharePoint is disabled
by default.
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the
printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
144 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Step two: Enable Scan to SharePoint and create a Scan to SharePoint Quick Set
Follow the steps to enable the Scan to SharePoint feature and create a Scan to SharePoint Quick Set.
1. Using the top navigation tabs, click Scan/Digital Send.
2. In the left navigation pane, click Scan to SharePoint®.
NOTE: Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be accessed on the printer Home screen or within the Quick
Sets application.
3. Select Enable Scan to SharePoint®, and then click Apply.
4. In the Scan to SharePoint area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets. Click Add to launch the Quick Set
Wizard.
5. Enter a Quick Set Name (for example, “Scan to SharePoint”) and a Quick Set Description.
6. Select a Quick Set Start Option to determine what occurs after selecting a Quick Set on the printer control
panel, and then click Next.
7. Use the following steps to add the path to the SharePoint folder:
a. Click Add on the SharePoint Destination Settings page to open the Add SharePoint Path page.
b. Open another browser window, navigate to the SharePoint folder to use, and then copy the folder
path for the SharePoint folder from that browser window.
c. Paste the SharePoint folder path into the SharePoint Path: eld.
d. By default, the printer overwrites an existing le that has the same le name as the new le. Clear
Overwrite existing les so that a new le with the same name as an existing le is given an updated
time/date stamp.
e. Select an option from the Authentication Settings drop-down menu. Select whether it is necessary to
sign in to the SharePoint site with credentials, or store the credentials within the Quick Set.
ENWW Set up Scan to SharePoint 145
NOTE: Use credentials of user to connect after Sign In at the control panel is selected in the
Authentication Settings drop-down menu, the logged-in user must have permission to write to the
specied SharePoint site.
NOTE: For security purposes, the printer does not display credentials entered in the Quick Set
Wizard.
f. Click OK to complete the SharePoint path setup, and navigate back to the SharePoint Destination
Settings page.
8. Select Verify folder access prior to job start to ensure that the SharePoint folder specied as the destination
folder is accessible each time the Quick Set is used. If this option is not selected, jobs can be saved to the
SharePoint folder more quickly. However, if this option is not selected and the SharePoint folder is
inaccessible, the job will fail.
9. Click Next.
10. Set a Condition on Which to Notify on the Notication Settings page. This setting congures the Quick Set to
either not notify, or to send email messages or print a summary page if a job either completes successfully
or fails. Select one of the following options from the Condition on Which to Notify drop-down menu:
●Select Do not notify for the Quick Set to not perform any notication action when a job completes
successfully or fails.
●Select Notify when job completes to for the Quick Set to send a notication when a job completes
successfully.
●Select Notify only if job fails to for the Quick Set to send a notication only when a job fails.
Selecting either Notify when job completes or Notify only if job fails requires the Method Used to Deliver
Notication: to be set. Select from the following options:
●Email: Use this option to send an email when the selected notication condition occurs. This option
requires a valid email address in the Notication Email Address: eld.
NOTE: To use the email notication feature, rst congure the email feature on the printer.
●Print: Use this option to print the notication when the selected notication condition occurs.
NOTE: Select Include Thumbnail for either notication option to include a thumbnail image of the
rst page of the scanned page of the job.
11. Click Next.
12. Select options from the Scan Settings page, and then click Next. For more information, see Table 6-10 Scan
settings for Scan to SharePoint on page 148.
13. Select options from the File Settings page, and then click Next. For more information, see Table 6-11 File
settings for Scan to SharePoint on page 148.
14. Review the summary of settings. Click Finish to save the Quick Set or click Previous to edit the settings.
Scan a le directly to a SharePoint site
Follow the steps to scan a document directly to a SharePoint site.
146 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to SharePoint®.
NOTE: It might be necessary to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
3. Under Quick Sets, touch Select, select a Quick Set, and then select Load.
4. Touch the File Name: text eld to open a keyboard. Type the name for the le using either the on-screen
keyboard or the physical keyboard, and touch the Enter button .
5. Touch Options to view and congure settings for the document.
6. Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. In the preview screen, use the buttons on the
right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or remove pages.
Table 6-9 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
ENWW Set up Scan to SharePoint 147
Table 6-9 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to save it to the SharePoint location.
Quick Set scan settings and options for Scan to SharePoint
Review the settings and options available in the Quick Set Wizard when adding, editing, or copying a Scan to
SharePoint Quick Set.
Table 6-10 Scan settings for Scan to SharePoint
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or millimeters, for
the front side and back side of a job.
Table 6-11 File settings for Scan to SharePoint
Feature Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les to be saved.
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
148 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Table 6-11 File settings for Scan to SharePoint (continued)
Feature Description
File Name Suix Set the default le name suix used for les to be saved.
Duplicate lename suix default [lename]_YYYYMMDDT
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job has
just one le (ex. _1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one le instead of multiple les.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
High Compression (smaller le) Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size. However, the scanning
process for a High compression le might take longer than for a Normal compression le.
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A password must be specied as
part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The user will be prompted to
enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to starting the scan.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show
more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the le size is
smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-quality images,
and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a predetermined maximum number of
pages per le.
ENWW Set up Scan to SharePoint 149
Set up Scan to USB Drive
Enable the Scan to USB feature, which allows you to scan directly to a USB ash drive.
●Introduction
●Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
●Step two: Enable Scan to USB Drive
●Step three: Congure the Quick Sets (optional)
●Default scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup
●Default le settings for Save to USB setup
Introduction
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and save it to a USB ash drive. The feature is not
available until it has been congured through the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS).
Step one: Access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Open the EWS to start the setup process.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the
printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
150 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Step two: Enable Scan to USB Drive
Enable Scan to USB Drive using the following steps.
1. Select the Security tab.
2. Scroll to Hardware Ports and make sure that Enable Host USB plug and play is enabled.
3. Select the Copy/Print tab for MFP models or the Print tab for SFP models.
4. Select the Enable Save to USB check box.
5. Click Apply at the bottom of the page.
NOTE: Most devices ship with hard disk drives (HDDs) already installed. In some cases, additional storage
devices can be added via USB. Verify whether the Save to USB feature needs to be expanded to USB and hard
drive.
Step three: Congure the Quick Sets (optional)
Use the following steps to set up Quick Sets for Scan to USB Drive. Quick Sets are shortcut jobs that can be
accessed on the printer Home screen or within the Quick Sets application.
1. In the Scan to USB Drive area of the left navigation pane, click Quick Sets.
2. Select one of the following options:
●Select an existing Quick Set under Quick Sets Application in the table.
-OR-
●Click Add to start the Quick Set Wizard.
3. If you clicked Add, the Quick Sets Setup page opens. Complete the following information:
a. Quick Set Name: Enter a title for the new Quick Set.
b. Quick Set Description: Enter a description of the Quick Set.
c. Quick Set Start Option: To set how the Quick Set starts, click either Enter application, then user
presses Start or Start instantly when selected from the Home Screen.
4. Select a default location where scanned les are saved on USB storage devices inserted into the USB port
on the control panel, and then click Next. The default location options are:
●Save at root directory of the USB storage device.
●Create or place in this folder on the USB Storage Device — The path to the folder on the USB storage
device must be specied when using this le location option. A backslash \ must be used to separate
folder\subfolder names in the path.
5. Select an option from the Condition on Which to Notify: drop-down list, and then click Next.
This setting determines if, or how, users are notied when a Save To USB Quick Set job completes or fails.
The options for the Condition on Which to Notify: setting are:
ENWW Set up Scan to USB Drive 151
●Do not notify
●Notify when job completes
●Notify only if job fails
6. Choose the Scan Settings for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
NOTE: For more information on the available scan settings, see Default scan settings for Scan to USB
Drive setup on page 152
7. Choose the File Settings for the Quick Set, and then click Next.
NOTE: For more information on the available le settings, see Default scan settings for Scan to USB Drive
setup on page 152
8. Review the summary of settings, and then click Finish to save the Quick Set, or click Previous to edit the
settings.
Default scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup
Review the default settings for Scan to USB Drive setup.
Table 6-12 Scan settings for Scan to USB Drive setup
Feature Description
Original Size Select the page size of the original document.
Original Sides Select whether the original document is single-sided or double-sided.
Optimize Text/Picture Select to optimize for the output of a particular type of content.
Content Orientation Select the way the content of the original document is placed on the page: Portrait or Landscape.
Background Cleanup Select a value to remove faint images from the background or to remove a light background color.
Darkness Select a value to adjust the darkness of the le.
Contrast Select a value to adjust the contrast of the le.
Sharpness Select a value to adjust the sharpness of the le.
Image Preview Select whether to require or make optional a displayed preview of the job or to disable a preview.
Cropping Options Select whether or not to allow a job to be cropped and the type of cropping option.
Erase Edges Select this setting to specify the width of edge margins to be erased, in either inches or millimeters, for
the front side and back side of a job.
Default le settings for Save to USB setup
Review the options for Save to USB setup.
Table 6-13 File settings for Save to USB setup
Option name Description
File Name Prex Set the default le name prex used for les saved to a network folder.
152 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Table 6-13 File settings for Save to USB setup (continued)
Option name Description
File Name Default le name for the le to be saved.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
File Name Suix Set the default le name suix used for les saved to a network folder.
Duplicate lename suix default [lename]_YYYYMMDDT
File Name Preview Enter a le name, and then click the Update Preview button.
File Numbering Format Select a le name format for when the job is divided into multiple les.
Add numbering when job has
just one le (ex. _1–1)
Select this setting to add numbering to a le name when the job is only one le instead of multiple les.
File Type Select the le format for the saved le.
Select the User editable check box to make this setting editable at the printer control panel.
High Compression (smaller le) Select this setting to compress the scanned le, which reduces the le size. However, the scanning
process for a High compression le might take longer than for a Normal compression le.
PDF encryption If the le type is PDF, then this option encrypts the output PDF le. A password must be specied as
part of the encryption. The same password must be used to open the le. The user will be prompted to
enter a password prior to scanning their job if one has not been set prior to starting the scan.
Resolution Set the resolution for the le. Higher resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show
more detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the le size is
smaller.
Quality and File Size Select the quality for the le. Higher-quality images require a larger le size than lower-quality images,
and they take more time to send.
Color/Black Specify whether copies are to be printed in color, black and gray, or black only.
Suppress blank pages If the Suppress blank pages option is enabled, blank pages will be ignored.
Create Multiple Files Select this setting to scan pages into separate les based on a predetermined maximum number of
pages per le.
ENWW Set up Scan to USB Drive 153
Scan to email
Scan a document directly to an email address or contact list. The scanned document is sent as an email message
attachment.
●Introduction
●Scan to email
Introduction
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and send it to one or more email addresses.
Scan to email
Use the following steps to scan a document directly to an email address or contact list.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to Email.
NOTE: If prompted, type your user name and password.
3. Touch the To eld to open a keyboard.
NOTE: If you are signed in to the printer, your user name or other default information might appear in the
From eld. If so, you might not be able to change it.
4. Specify the recipients by using one of these methods:
●Use the keypad to enter the address in the To eld.
To send to multiple addresses, separate the addresses with a semicolon, or select the Enter button
on the touchscreen keyboard after typing each address.
●Use a contact list as follows:
1. Select the Contacts button that is next to the To eld to open the Contacts screen.
2. Select the appropriate contact list.
3. Select a name or names from the list of contacts to add to the recipients list, and then select
Add.
5. Complete the Subject, File Name, and Message elds by touching the eld and using the touchscreen
keyboard to enter information. Select the Close button whenever you need to close the keyboard.
6. To load a Quick Set, select Load, select the Quick Set, and then select Load under the Quick Sets list.
NOTE: Quick Sets are predened settings for various types of output, such as Text, Photograph, and High
Quality. You can select a Quick Set to view the description.
7. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Original Sides, and Content Orientation, select
Options in the lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done if
prompted.
154 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
8. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
Table 6-14 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 6-15 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
ENWW Scan to email 155
Table 6-15 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
9. When the document is ready, select Send to email it.
NOTE: The printer might prompt you to add the email address to the contact list.
156 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Scan to job storage
Scan a document and save it to a job storage folder on the printer.
●Introduction
●Scan to job storage on the printer
●Print from job storage on the printer
Introduction
The printer has a feature that enables it to scan a document and save it to a job storage folder on the printer. You
can retrieve the document from the printer and print it when needed.
NOTE: Before you can scan to a storage folder on the printer, your printer administrator or IT department must
use the HP Embedded Web Server to enable the feature and congure the settings.
Scan to job storage on the printer
Use this procedure to scan a document and save it to a job storage folder on the printer so that you can print
copies at any time.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to Job Storage.
NOTE: If prompted, enter your user name and password.
3. Select the default storage folder name shown under Folder.
If the printer administrator has congured the option, you can create a new folder. Follow these steps to
create a new folder:
a. Select the New Folder icon .
b. Select the New Folder eld, type the folder name, and then select OK.
4. Make sure that you have selected the correct folder.
5. Touch the Job Name text eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the le, and then select
the Enter button .
6. To make the job private, select the PIN button , enter a four-digit PIN in the PIN eld, and then close the
touchscreen keypad.
7. To congure settings, such as Sides and Content Orientation, select Options in the lower left corner, and
then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done for each setting if prompted.
8. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
ENWW Scan to job storage 157
Table 6-16 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 6-17 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
158 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Table 6-17 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
9. When the document is ready, select Save to save the le to the storage folder.
Print from job storage on the printer
Use this procedure to print a scanned document that is in a job storage folder on the printer.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Print application, select the Print icon,
and then select Print from Job Storage.
2. Under Stored Jobs to Print, select Choose, select the folder in which the document is saved, select the
document, and then select Select.
3. If the document is private, enter the four-digit PIN in the Password eld, and then select OK.
4. To adjust the number of copies, touch the box to the left of the Print button, and then select the number of
copies from the keypad that opens. Select the Close button to close the keypad.
5. Select Print to print the document.
ENWW Scan to job storage 159
Scan to network folder
Scan a document and save it to a folder on the network.
●Introduction
●Scan to network folder
Introduction
The printer can scan a le and save it in a shared folder on the network.
Scan to network folder
Use this procedure to scan a document and save it to a network folder.
NOTE: You might be required to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to Network Folder.
3. Specify a folder destination. Folder options must rst be congured by the printer administrator.
●To select a folder location that the administrator already set up, select Load under Quick Sets and
Defaults, select the folder, and then select Load.
●To specify a new folder location, touch the Folder Paths eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type
the path to the folder, and then select the Enter button . Enter user credentials if prompted and
then select Save to save the path.
NOTE: Use this format for the path: \\server\folder, where “server” is the name of the server
that hosts the shared folder, and “folder” is the name of the shared folder. If the folder is nested inside
other folders, complete all necessary segments of the path to reach the folder. For example: \
\server\folder\folder
NOTE: The Folder Paths eld might have a pre-dened path, and it might not be editable. In this
situation, the administrator has congured this folder for common access.
4. Touch the File Name text eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the le, and then select
the Enter button .
5. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Original Sides, and Content Orientation, select
Options in the lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done for each
setting if prompted.
6. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
160 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Table 6-18 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 6-19 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
ENWW Scan to network folder 161
Table 6-19 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to save the le to the network folder.
162 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Scan to SharePoint
Scan a document directly to a SharePoint site.
●Introduction
●Scan to SharePoint
Introduction
If you have a workow-equipped printer, you can scan a document and send it to a SharePoint site. This feature
eliminates the need to scan the documents to a network folder, USB ash drive, or email message, and then
manually upload the les to the SharePoint site.
Scan to SharePoint supports all scanning options, including the ability to scan documents as images or use the
OCR features to create text les or searchable PDFs.
NOTE: Before you can scan to SharePoint, your printer administrator or IT department must use the HP
Embedded Web Server to enable the feature and set it up.
Scan to SharePoint
Use the following steps to scan a document directly to a SharePoint site.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to SharePoint®.
NOTE: It might be necessary to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
3. Under Quick Sets, touch Select, select a Quick Set, and then select Load.
4. Select the File Name: text eld to open a keyboard. Type the name for the le, and then select the enter
button .
5. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Sides, and Content Orientation, select Options in the
lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done if prompted.
6. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
Table 6-20 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
ENWW Scan to SharePoint 163
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 6-21 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to save it to the SharePoint location.
164 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Scan to USB drive
Scan a document directly to a USB drive.
●Introduction
●Scan to USB drive
Introduction
The printer can scan a le and save it to a USB ash drive.
Scan to USB drive
Use the following steps to scan a document directly to a USB drive.
NOTE: You might be required to sign in to the printer to use this feature.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. Insert the USB drive into the USB port near the printer control panel.
3. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, select the Scan icon,
and then select Scan to USB Drive.
4. Select the USB drive under Destination, and then select the save location (either the root of the USB drive or
an existing folder).
5. Touch the File Name text eld to open a touchscreen keyboard, type the name for the le, and then select
the Enter button .
6. To congure settings, such as File Type and Resolution, Original Sides, and Content Orientation, select
Options in the lower left corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done if
prompted.
7. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
Table 6-22 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
ENWW Scan to USB drive 165
Table 6-23 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
8. When the document is ready, select Save to save the le to the USB drive.
166 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions
HP JetAdvantage solutions are workow and printing solutions that are easy to use, and both network- and
cloud-based. HP JetAdvantage solutions are designed to help businesses of all types, including healthcare,
nancial services, manufacturing, and public sector, manage a eet of printers and scanners.
HP JetAdvantage Solutions include:
●HP JetAdvantage Security solutions
●HP JetAdvantage Management solutions
●HP JetAdvantage Workow solutions
●HP JetAdvantage Mobile Printing solutions
For more information about HP JetAdvantage business workow and printing solutions, go to www.hp.com/go/
PrintSolutions.
Additional scan tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common scan tasks.
Go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP.
Instructions are available for performing specic scan tasks, such as the following:
●Copy or scan pages from books or other bound documents
●Send a scanned document to a folder in the printer memory
●Copy or scan both sides of an identication card
●Copy or scan a document into a booklet format
ENWW Use HP JetAdvantage business solutions 167
168 Chapter 6 Scan ENWW
7 Fax
Congure the fax features, and send and receive faxes using the printer.
●Set up fax
●Change fax congurations
●Send a fax
●Additional fax tasks
For video assistance, see www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
●Install and congure
●Learn and use
●Solve problems
●Download software and rmware updates
●Join support forums
●Find warranty and regulatory information
ENWW 169
Set up fax
Set up the fax features for the printer.
●Introduction
●Set up fax by using the printer control panel
Introduction
This information applies to fax and Flow models, or to other printers when an optional analog fax accessory has
been installed. Before continuing, connect the printer to a phone line (for analog fax) or to an Internet or network
fax service.
Set up fax by using the printer control panel
Congure the fax features using the control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Internal Fax Modem Setup
NOTE: If the Internal Fax Modem Setup menu does not appear in the menu listing, LAN or Internet
fax might be enabled. When LAN or Internet fax is enabled, the analog fax accessory is disabled and
the Internal Fax Modem Setup menu does not display. Only one fax feature, either LAN fax, analog
fax, or Internet fax, can be enabled at a time. To use analog fax when LAN fax is enabled, use the HP
Embedded Web Server to disable LAN fax.
3. Select the location from the list on the right side of the screen, and then select Next.
4. Touch the Company Name text eld, and use the keypad to type the company name.
5. Touch the Fax Number text eld, and use the keypad to type the sending fax number. Select Next.
6. Verify that the date and time settings are correct. Make changes as necessary, and then select Next.
7. If a dialing prex is required for sending faxes, touch the Dialing Prex text eld, and use the keypad to
enter the number.
8. Review all the information on the left pane, and then select Finish to complete the fax setup.
170 Chapter 7 Fax ENWW
Change fax congurations
Change or update fax settings.
●Fax dialing settings
●General fax send settings
●Fax receive settings
NOTE: The settings congured using the control panel override any settings made in the HP Embedded Web
Server.
Fax dialing settings
Use the following steps to change the fax dialing settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
c. Fax Dialing Settings
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-1 Fax dialing settings
Menu item Description
Redial on Error The Redial on Error feature sets the number of times a fax number will be redialed
when an error occurs during a fax transmission.
Redial on No Answer The Redial on No Answer setting selects the number of times the fax accessory redials
if the number dialed does not answer. The number of retries is either 0 to 1 (used in
the U.S.) or 0 to 2, depending on the location setting. The interval between retries is
set by the Redial Interval setting.
Redial on Busy The Redial on Busy setting selects the number of times (0 through 9) the fax accessory
redials a number when the number is busy. The interval between retries is set by the
Redial Interval setting.
Redial Interval The Redial Interval setting selects the number of minutes between retries if the
number dialed is busy or not answering, or if an error occurs.
NOTE: You might observe a redial message on the control panel when both the
Redial on Busy and Redial on No Answer settings are set to o. This occurs when the
fax accessory dials a number, establishes a connection, and then loses the connection.
As a result of this error condition, the fax accessory performs three automatic redial
attempts regardless of the redial settings. During this redial operation, a message
displays on the control panel to indicate that a redial is in progress.
ENWW Change fax congurations 171
Table 7-1 Fax dialing settings (continued)
Menu item Description
Fax Send Speed The Fax Send Speed setting sets the modem bit rate (measured in bits per second) of
the Analog Fax modem while sending a fax.
●Fast (v.34 – 33.6k)
●Medium (v.17 – 14.4k)
●Slow (v.29 – 9.6k)
Line Monitor Volume Use the Line Monitor Volume setting to control the printer's dialing volume level when
sending faxes.
Dialing Mode The Dialing Mode setting sets the type of dialing that is used: either tone (touch-tone
phones) or pulse (rotary-dial phones).
Dialing Prex The Dialing Prex setting allows you to enter a prex number (such as a "9" to access
an outside line) when dialing. This prex number is automatically added to all phone
numbers when dialed.
Detect Dial Tone The Detect Dial Tone setting determines whether the fax checks for a dial tone before
sending a fax.
General fax send settings
Use the following steps to change the fax send settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
c. General Fax Send Settings
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-2 Fax send settings
Menu item Description
Fax Number Conrmation When the Fax Number Conrmation feature is enabled, the fax number must be
entered twice to ensure that it was entered correctly. The feature is disabled by
default.
PC Fax Send Use the PC Fax Send feature to send faxes from a PC. This feature is enabled by
default.
172 Chapter 7 Fax ENWW
Table 7-2 Fax send settings (continued)
Menu item Description
Error Correction Mode Normally, the fax accessory monitors the signals on the telephone line while it is
sending or receiving a fax. If the fax accessory detects an error during the transmission
and the Error Correction Mode setting is on, the fax accessory can request that the
error portion of the fax be sent again.
The Error Correction Mode feature is enabled by default. You should turn it o only if
you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax and if you are willing to accept the
errors in the transmission and a probable quality reduction in the image. Turning o
the setting might be useful when you are trying to send a fax overseas or receive one
from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.
NOTE: Some VoIP providers might suggest turning o the Error Correction Mode
setting. However, this is not usually necessary.
Fax Header Use the Fax Header feature to control whether the header is appended to the top, and
content is shifted down, or if the header is overlaid on top of the previous header.
Fax receive settings
Use the following steps to change the fax receive settings.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Fax Receive Setup
3. Congure any of the following settings, and then select Done.
Table 7-3 Fax receive settings
Menu item Description
Receive Mode The Receive Mode setting determines how the fax accessory receives fax jobs. Select
one of the following options:
●Automatic
●TAM
●Fax/Tel
●Manual
Rings to Answer The Rings to Answer setting determines the number of times the phone rings before
the call is answered by the fax accessory.
NOTE: The default range for the available options for the Rings to Answer setting is
location-specic. The range of possible Rings to Answer options is limited by location.
If the fax accessory is not answering, and the Rings to Answer setting is 1, try
increasing it to 2.
Ring Volume The Ring Volume setting allows you to adjust the ringer volume.
ENWW Change fax congurations 173
Table 7-3 Fax receive settings (continued)
Menu item Description
Fax Receive Speed Touch the Fax Receive Speed drop-down menu and select one of the following options:
●Fast (v.34 – 33.6k)
●Medium (v.17 – 14.4k)
●Slow (v.29 – 9.6k)
Extension Phone This setting allows you use a separate telephone in conjunction with the fax functions.
Allow Reprinting This setting allows you to reprint received faxes.
Receive to PC This setting allows you to receive faxes directly to your computer.
Fax Polling This setting allows you to enable or disable the fax polling function.
Fax/Tel Ring Time This setting determines the number of times the phone rings before the fax/tel mode
initiates.
Send a fax
Use the following steps to send a fax from the printer.
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass, or place it face-up in the document feeder and adjust
the paper guides to t the size of the document.
2. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select the Fax
icon. You might be prompted to type a user name and password.
3. Specify the recipients using one of these methods:
●Use the keypad to enter the recipient or recipients.
Touch the Fax Recipients text eld, and then use the keypad to enter the fax number. To send to
multiple fax numbers, separate the numbers with a semicolon, or select the Enter button on the
touchscreen keyboard after typing each number.
●Use a contact list as follows:
1. Select the Contacts button that is next to the Fax Recipients eld to open the Contacts
screen.
2. Select the appropriate contact list.
3. Select a name or names from the list of contacts to add to the recipients list, and then select
Add.
4. To load a Quick Set, select Load, select the Quick Set, and then select Load under the Quick Sets list.
NOTE: Quick Sets are predened settings for various types of output, such as Text, Photograph, and High
Quality. You can select a Quick Set to view the description.
5. To congure settings, such as Resolution, Sides, and Content Orientation, select Options in the lower left
corner, and then select the settings from the Options menus. Select Done if prompted.
6. Optional Preview: Touch the right pane of the screen to preview the document. You can use the Expand and
Collapse buttons on the left side of the preview pane to expand and collapse the preview screen.
174 Chapter 7 Fax ENWW
Table 7-4 Buttons on the left side of the preview pane
Button Description
Expand the preview screen.
Collapse the preview screen.
Use the buttons on the right of the screen to adjust the preview options and to rearrange, rotate, insert, or
remove pages.
Table 7-5 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane
Button Description
Use these buttons to toggle between single-page view and thumbnail view. More options are available in
thumbnail view than in single-page view.
Use these buttons to zoom in or out on the selected page.
NOTE: Select only one page at a time to use these buttons.
Use this button to rotate the page 180 degrees.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use this button to delete the selected pages.
NOTE: This button is available only in the thumbnail view.
Use these buttons to rearrange the pages within the document. Select one or more pages and move
them to the left or right.
NOTE: These buttons are available only in the thumbnail view.
ENWW Send a fax 175
Table 7-5 Buttons on the right side of the preview pane (continued)
Button Description
Use this button to add a page to the document. The printer prompts to scan additional pages.
Use this button to clear the changes made in the preview and start over.
Touch this button to collapse the preview screen and return to the Copy screen.
7. When the document is ready, select Send to send the fax.
Additional fax tasks
Locate information on the Web for performing common fax tasks.
Go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP.
Instructions are available for fax tasks, such as the following:
●Create and manage fax speed dial lists
●Congure fax billing codes
●Use a fax printing schedule
●Block incoming faxes
●Fax archiving and forwarding
176 Chapter 7 Fax ENWW
8 Manage the printer
Utilize management tools, congure security and energy-conservation settings, and manage rmware updates
for the printer.
●Advanced conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
●Congure IP network settings
●Printer security features
●Energy-conservation settings
●HP Web Jetadmin
●Software and rmware updates
For video assistance, see www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
●Install and congure
●Learn and use
●Solve problems
●Download software and rmware updates
●Join support forums
●Find warranty and regulatory information
ENWW 177
Advanced conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage advanced printing functions.
●Introduction
●How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
●HP Embedded Web Server features
Introduction
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to manage printing functions from a computer instead of the printer control
panel.
●View printer status information
●Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones
●View and change tray congurations
●View and change the printer control-panel menu conguration
●View and print internal pages
●Receive notication of printer and supplies events
●View and change network conguration
The HP Embedded Web Server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The HP Embedded
Web Server does not support IPX-based printer connections. Internet access is not needed to open and use the
HP Embedded Web Server.
When the printer is connected to the network, the HP Embedded Web Server is automatically available.
NOTE: The HP Embedded Web Server is not accessible beyond the network rewall.
How to access the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Use the following steps to open the EWS.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
2. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays on the
printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be safe,
select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
To use the HP Embedded Web Server, the browser must meet the following requirements:
178 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
Windows® 7
●Internet Explorer (version 8.x or greater)
●Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
●Firefox (version 20.x or greater)
Windows® 8 or greater
●Internet Explorer (version 9.x or greater)
●Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
●Firefox (version 20.x or greater)
macOS
●Safari (version 5.x or greater)
●Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
Linux
●Google Chrome (version 34.x or greater)
●Firefox (version 20.x or greater)
ENWW Advanced conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 179
HP Embedded Web Server features
Learn about the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) features available on each tab.
●Information tab
●General tab
●Copy/Print tab
●Scan/Digital Send tab
●Fax tab
●Supplies tab
●Troubleshooting tab
●Security tab
●HP Web Services tab
●Networking tab
●Other Links list
Information tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Information tab.
Table 8-1 HP Embedded Web Server Information tab
Menu Description
Device Status Shows the printer status and shows the estimated life remaining of HP supplies. The page
also shows the type and size of paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click
the Change Settings link.
Job Log Provides a list of the jobs that have been printed.
Conguration Page Shows the information found on the conguration page.
Supplies Status Page Shows the status of the supplies for the printer.
Event Log Page Shows a list of all printer events and errors. Use the HP Instant Support link (in the Other
Links area on all HP Embedded Web Server pages) to connect to a set of dynamic web
pages that help solve problems. These pages also show additional services available for
the printer.
Usage Page Shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed, grouped by size, type,
and paper print path.
Device Information Shows the printer network name, address, and model information. To customize these
entries, click the Device Information menu on the General tab.
Control Panel Snapshot Shows an image of the current screen on the control panel display.
Remote Control-Panel Provides a way to troubleshoot or manage the printer from a browser window on a desktop
or laptop.
Print Allows the user to send a print-ready le to the printer to be printed.
180 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
Table 8-1 HP Embedded Web Server Information tab (continued)
Menu Description
Printable Reports and Pages Lists the internal reports and pages for the printer. Select one or more items to print or
view.
Open Source Licenses Shows a summary of the licenses for open source software programs that can be used with
the printer.
General tab
Refer to the table for settings in the General tab.
Table 8-2 HP Embedded Web Server General tab
Menu Description
Control Panel Customization Reorder, show, or hide features on the control-panel display.
Change the default display language and keyboard layouts.
Quick Sets Congure jobs that are available in the Quick Sets area of the Home screen on the printer
control panel.
Alerts Set up email alerts for various printer and supplies events.
Control Panel Settings App Shows the Settings app options that are available on the printer control panel.
General Settings Congure how the printer recovers from jams and other general printer settings.
AutoSend Congure the printer to send automated emails regarding printer conguration and
supplies to specic email addresses.
Edit Other Links Add or customize a link to another website. This link displays in the footer area on all
HP Embedded Web Server pages.
Ordering Information Enter information about ordering replacement toner cartridges. This information displays
on the supplies status page.
Device Information Name the printer and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name of the primary contact
who will receive information about the printer.
Language Set the language in which to display the HP Embedded Web Server information.
Firmware Upgrade Download and install printer rmware upgrade les.
Date/Time Settings Set the date and time or synchronize with a network time server.
Energy Settings Set or edit a wake time, sleep time, and sleep delay for the printer. Set a dierent schedule
for each day of the week and for holidays.
Set which interactions with the printer cause it to wake from sleep mode.
Back up and Restore Create a backup le that contains printer and user data. If necessary, use this le to restore
data to the printer.
Reset Factory Settings Restore printer settings to the factory defaults.
Solution Installer Install third-party software packages that extend or modify the functionality of the printer.
Job Statistics Settings Provides connection information about third-party job-statistics services.
Quota Settings Provides connection information about third-party job-quota services.
ENWW Advanced conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 181
Copy/Print tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Copy/Print tab.
Table 8-3 HP Embedded Web Server Copy/Print tab
Menu Description
Print from USB Drive Settings Enable or disable the Print from USB Drive menu on the control panel.
Manage Stored Jobs Enable or disable the ability to store jobs in the printer memory.
Congure job-storage options.
Default Print Options Congure the default options for print jobs.
Restrict Color
(Color printers only)
Permit or restrict color printing and copying.
Specify permissions for individual users or for jobs that are sent from specic software
programs.
PCL and PostScript Settings Adjust the PCL and PostScript settings for all print jobs, including copy jobs and received
faxes.
Print Quality Congure the print quality settings, including color adjustment, image registration, and
allowed paper types.
Manage Supplies Use this page to apply settings for the product supplies.
Copy Settings Congure the default options and Quick Sets for copy jobs.
NOTE: If job-specic copy setting options are not set from the control panel at the start of
a job, the default settings will be used for the job.
Manage Trays Congure settings for paper trays.
Scan/Digital Send tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Scan/Digital Send tab.
Table 8-4 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab
Menu Description
Email Setup Congure the default email settings for digital sending, including the following:
●Settings for the outgoing mail (SMTP) server
●Settings for Email Quick Sets jobs
●Default message settings, such as the "From" address and the subject line
●Settings for digital signatures and encryption
●Settings for email notications
●Default scan settings for email jobs
●Default le settings for email jobs
182 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
Table 8-4 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab (continued)
Menu Description
Scan to Network Folder Congure the network folder settings for digital sending, including the following:
●Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a network folder
●Settings for notications
●Default scan settings for jobs saved in a network folder
●Default le settings for jobs saved in a network folder
Scan to SharePoint®
(Flow models only)
Congure the SharePoint settings for digital sending, including the following:
●Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a document library on the SharePoint site
●Default settings for jobs saved in a document library on the SharePoint site
Scan to USB Drive Congure the USB settings for digital sending, including the following:
●Settings for Quick Sets jobs saved on a USB ash drive
●Settings for notications
●Default scan settings for jobs saved on a USB ash drive
●Default le settings for jobs saved on a USB ash drive
Contacts Manage contacts, including the following:
●Add email addresses into the printer one at a time.
●Import a large list of frequently-used email addresses on to the printer all at once,
rather than adding them one at a time.
●Export contacts from the printer into a .CSV le on the computer to use as a data
backup, or import the records onto another HP printer.
●Edit email addresses that have already been saved in the printer.
Preferences Manage general scanning settings.
Email and Scan to Network Folder Quick
Setup Wizards
Congure the printer to send scanned images as email attachments.
Congure the printer to save scanned images to network-folder Quick Sets. Quick Sets
provide easy access to les saved on the network.
Digital Sending Software Setup Congure settings related to using optional Digital Sending software.
Fax tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Fax tab.
ENWW Advanced conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 183
Table 8-5 HP Embedded Web Server Fax tab
Menu Description
Fax Send Setup Congure settings for sending faxes, including the following:
●Default settings for outgoing faxes
●Settings for fax Quick Sets jobs
●Settings for notications
●Default setting for sending faxes using the internal fax modem
●Settings for using a LAN fax service
●Settings for using an Internet fax service
Fax Speed Dials Manage speed dials, including the following:
●Import .CSV les containing email addresses, fax numbers, or user records, so that
they can be accessed on this printer.
●Export email, fax, or user records from the printer into a le on the computer to use
as a data backup, or import the records onto another HP printer.
Fax Receive Setup Congure default print options for incoming faxes, and set up a fax printing schedule.
Fax Archive and Forwarding Enable or disable fax archiving and fax forwarding, and congure basic settings for each:
●Fax archiving is a method to send a copy of all incoming and outgoing faxes to an
email address, a network folder, or an FTP server.
●Fax forwarding is a method to forward incoming faxes to a dierent fax device.
Fax Activity Log Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this printer.
Supplies tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Supplies tab.
Table 8-6 HP Embedded Web Server Supplies tab
Menu Description
Manage Supplies Congure how the printer reacts when supplies reach a Very Low state.
Troubleshooting tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Troubleshooting tab.
184 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
Table 8-7 HP Embedded Web Server Troubleshooting tab
Menu Description
General Troubleshooting Use the following options as appropriate:
●Reports and Tests area: Select and print several types of reports and tests. Some
reports can be viewed in the EWS by clicking the View button.
●Fax Tools area: Congure settings for fax troubleshooting. (MFP and Digital Sender
products only)
●OXPd Troubleshooting area: Enable or disable the Allow a Non-Secure Connection for
Web Services option
●Auto Recovery area: Enable or disable the Enable Auto Recovery option.
Online Help Link to HP cloud-based online help to assist in troubleshooting printing issues.
Diagnostic Data
NOTE: This item is available only if an
administrator password is set from the
Security tab.
Export printer information to a le that can be useful for detailed problem analysis.
Calibration/Cleaning
(Color printers only)
Enable the automatic cleaning feature, create and print the cleaning page, and select an
option to calibrate the printer immediately.
Reset Factory Settings Restore printer settings to factory defaults.
Firmware Upgrade Download and install printer rmware upgrade les.
Security tab
Refer to the table for settings in the Security tab.
Table 8-8 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab
Menu Description
General Security Settings for general security, including the following:
●Congure an administrator password to restrict access to certain features on the
printer.
●Set PJL password for processing PJL commands.
●Set le system access and rmware upgrade security.
●Enable or disable the Host USB port on the control panel or the USB connectivity port
on the formatter for printing directly from a computer.
●View the status of all security settings.
Account Policy Enable administrator account settings.
Access Control Congure access to printer functions for specic individuals or groups, and select the
method individuals use to sign in to the printer.
Protect Stored Data Congure and manage the internal hard drive for the printer.
Congure settings for jobs that are stored on the printer hard drive.
ENWW Advanced conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 185
Table 8-8 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab (continued)
Menu Description
Manage Remote Apps Manage or whitelist remote apps by importing or deleting certicates that allow devices to
use this product.
Certicate Management Install and manage security certicates for access to the printer and the network.
Email Domain Restriction If email functionality is enabled, administrators can limit the email addresses to which the
printer can send messages.
Web Service Security Allow resources on this printer to be accessed by web pages from dierent domains. If no
sites are added to the list, then all sites are trusted.
Self Test Verify that the security functions are running according to expected system parameters.
HP Web Services tab
Use the HP Web Services tab to congure and enable HP Web Services for this printer. It is necessary to Enable
HP Web Services to use the HP ePrint feature.
Table 8-9 HP Embedded Web Server HP Web Services tab
Menu Description
Web Services Setup Connect this printer to HP Connected on the web by enabling HP Web Services.
Web Proxy Congure a proxy server if there are issues enabling HP Web Services or connecting the
printer to the Internet.
HP JetAdvantage Access solutions that extend the capabilities of the printer
Smart Cloud Print Enable Smart Cloud Print, which allows access to web-based apps that extend the
capabilities of the printer.
Networking tab
Use the Networking tab to congure and secure network settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP-
based network. This tab does not display if the printer is connected to other types of networks.
Table 8-10 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Conguration settings
Menu Description
Wireless Station Congure the initial wireless settings.
Wi-Fi Direct Congure Wi-Fi Direct settings for printers that include embedded Wi-Fi Direct Print and
NFC printing or that have a wireless accessory installed.
NOTE: The conguration options available depend on the print server model.
TCP/IP Settings Congure TCP/IP settings for IPv4 and IPv6 networks.
NOTE: The conguration options available depend on the print server model.
Network Settings Congure IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, DLC/LLC, and SNMP settings, depending on the print server
model.
Other Settings Congure general printing protocols and services supported by the print server. The
available options depend on the print server model, but can include rmware update, LPD
queues, USB settings, support information, and refresh rate.
186 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
Table 8-10 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Conguration settings (continued)
Menu Description
AirPrint Enable, set up, or disable network printing from Apple-supported printers.
Select Language Change the language displayed by the HP Embedded Web Server. This page displays if the
web pages support multiple languages. Optionally, select supported languages through
language-preference settings in the browser.
Select Location Select a country/region for the printer.
Table 8-11 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Google Cloud Print settings
Menu Description
Setup Set up Google Cloud Print options.
Web Proxy Congure proxy settings.
Table 8-12 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Security settings
Menu Description
Settings View and restore current security settings to factory-default values.
Congure security settings using the Security Conguration Wizard.
NOTE: Do not use the Security Conguration Wizard to congure security settings using
network-management applications, such as HP Web Jetadmin.
Authorization Control conguration management and use of this printer, including the following:
●Set or change the administrator password to control access to conguration
parameters.
●Request, install, and manage digital certicates on the HP Jetdirect print server.
●Limit host access to this printer through an Access Control List (ACL) (for selected print
servers on IPv4 networks only).
Secure Communication Congure security settings.
Mgmt. Protocols Congure and manage security protocols for this printer, including the following:
●Set the security management level for the HP Embedded Web Server, and control
traic over HTTP and HTTPS.
●Congure the SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) operation. Enable or
disable the SNMP v1/v2c or SNMP v3 agents on the print server.
●Control access through protocols that may not be secure, such as printing protocols,
print services, discovery protocols, name resolution services, and conguration-
management protocols.
802.1X Authentication Congure 802.1X authentication settings on the Jetdirect print server as required for client
authentication on the network, and reset the 802.1X authentication settings to factory-
default values.
CAUTION: When changing the 802.1X authentication settings; the printer might lose its
connection. To reconnect, it might be necessary to reset the print server to a factory-
default state and reinstall the printer.
ENWW Advanced conguration with the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) 187
Table 8-12 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Security settings (continued)
Menu Description
IPsec/Firewall View or congure a Firewall policy or an IPsec/Firewall policy.
Announcement Agent Enable or disable the HP Device Announcement Agent, set the conguration server, and
congure mutual authentication using certicates.
Table 8-13 HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab > Diagnostics settings
Menu Description
Network Statistics Display network statistics that are collected and stored on the HP Jetdirect print server.
Protocol Info View a list of network-conguration settings on the HP Jetdirect print server for each
protocol.
Conguration Page View the HP Jetdirect conguration page, which contains status and conguration
information.
Other Links list
Congure which links display in the footer of the HP Embedded Web Server by using the Edit Other Links menu
on the General tab.
NOTE: The following are the default links.
Table 8-14 HP Embedded Web Server Other Links list
Menu Description
HP Instant Support Connect to the HP website to nd solutions to printer problems.
Shop for Supplies Connect to the HP SureSupply website for information on purchasing original HP supplies,
such as cartridges and paper.
Product Support Connect to the support site for the printer to search for help on various topics.
188 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
Congure IP network settings
Use the EWS to congure the printer network settings.
●Printer sharing disclaimer
●View or change network settings
●Rename the printer on a network
●Manually congure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
●Manually congure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
●Link speed and duplex settings
Printer sharing disclaimer
Review the following disclaimer.
HP does not support peer-to-peer networking, as the feature is a function of Microsoft operating systems and
not of the HP printer drivers. Go to Microsoft at www.microsoft.com.
View or change network settings
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to view or change IP conguration settings.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Click the Networking tab to obtain network information. Change settings as needed.
Rename the printer on a network
To rename the printer on a network so that it can be uniquely identied, use the HP Embedded Web Server.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
ENWW Congure IP network settings 189
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Open the General tab.
3. On the Device Information page, the default printer name is in the Device Name eld. You can change this
name to uniquely identify this printer.
NOTE: Completing the other elds on this page is optional.
4. Click the Apply button to save the changes.
Manually congure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
Use the control-panel Settings menus to manually set an IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Ethernet
c. TCP/IP
d. IPV 4 Settings
e. Cong Method
3. Select the Manual option, and then touch the Save button.
4. Open the Manual Settings menu.
5. Touch the IP Address, Subnet Mask, or Default Gateway option.
6. Touch the rst eld to open a keypad. Enter the correct digits for the eld, and then touch the OK button.
Repeat the process for each eld, and then touch the Save button.
Manually congure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
Use the control-panel Settings menus to manually set an IPv6 address.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. To enable manual conguration, open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Ethernet
190 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
c. TCP/IP
d. IPV6 Settings
3. Select Enable, and then select On.
4. Select the Enable Manual Settings option, and then touch the Done button.
5. To congure the address, open the Address menu, and then touch the eld to open a keypad.
6. Use the keypad to enter the address, and then touch the OK button.
7. Touch Save.
Link speed and duplex settings
Use the following steps to make changes to link speed and duplex settings.
NOTE: This information applies only to Ethernet networks. It does not apply to wireless networks.
The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network hub. For most situations,
leave the printer in automatic mode. Incorrect changes to the link speed and duplex settings might prevent the
printer from communicating with other network devices. To make changes, use the printer control panel.
NOTE: The printer setting must match the setting for the network device (a network hub, switch, gateway,
router, or computer).
NOTE: Making changes to these settings causes the printer to turn o and then on. Make changes only when
the printer is idle.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Networking
b. Ethernet
c. Link Speed
3. Select one of the following options:
●Auto: The print server automatically congures itself for the highest link speed and communication
mode allowed on the network.
●10T Half: 10 megabytes per second (Mbps), half-duplex operation
●10T Full: 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation
●10T Auto: 10 Mbps, automatic-duplex operation
●100TX Half: 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation
●100TX Full: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation
ENWW Congure IP network settings 191
●100TX Auto: 100 Mbps, automatic-duplex operation
●1000T Full: 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation
4. Touch the Save button. The printer turns o and then on.
192 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
Printer security features
Restrict who has access to conguration settings, secure data, and prevent access to valuable hardware
components.
●Introduction
●Security statements
●Assign an administrator password
●IP Security
●Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks
●Lock the formatter
Introduction
The printer includes several security features to restrict who has access to conguration settings, to secure data,
and to prevent access to valuable hardware components.
Security statements
Review this important security statement.
The printer supports security standards and recommended protocols that help you keep the printer secure,
protect critical information on your network, and simplify the way you monitor and maintain the printer.
ENWW Printer security features 193
Assign an administrator password
Assign an administrator password for access to the printer and the HP Embedded Web Server so that
unauthorized users cannot change the printer settings.
●Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to set the password
●Provide user access credentials at the printer control panel
Use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to set the password
Use the following steps to set a password for the printer.
1. Open the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS):
a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, touch the Information icon , and then touch the
Ethernet icon to display the IP address or host name.
b. Open a web browser, and in the address line, type the IP address or host name exactly as it displays
on the printer control panel. Press the Enter key on the computer keyboard. The EWS opens.
NOTE: If the web browser displays a message indicating that accessing the website might not be
safe, select the option to continue to the website. Accessing this website will not harm the computer.
2. Click the Security tab.
3. Open the General Security menu.
4. In the area labeled Set the Local Administrator Password, enter the name to associate with the password in
the Username eld.
5. Enter the password in the New Password eld, and then enter it again in the Verify Password eld.
NOTE: To change an existing password, rst enter the existing password in the Old Password eld.
6. Click the Apply button.
IMPORTANT: Make note of the password and store it in a safe place. The administrator password cannot
be recovered. If the administrator password is lost or forgotten, contact HP Support for the assistance
required to completely reset the printer.
Click here to contact HP Support about resetting the printer password.
Provide user access credentials at the printer control panel
Use the following steps to sign into the control panel.
Some features on the printer control panel can be secured so that unauthorized people cannot use them. When
a feature is secured, the printer prompts you to sign in before you can use it. You can also sign in without waiting
for a prompt by selecting Sign In from the printer control panel.
Typically, the credentials for signing in to the printer are the same as for signing in to the network. Consult the
network administrator for this printer if you have questions about which credentials to use.
194 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Sign In.
2. Follow the prompts to enter the credentials.
NOTE: To maintain security for the printer, select Sign Out when you have nished using the printer.
IP Security
IP Security (IPsec) is a set of protocols that control IP-based network traic to and from the printer. IPsec
provides host-to-host authentication, data integrity, and encryption of network communications.
For printers that are connected to the network and have an HP Jetdirect print server, you can congure IPsec by
using the Networking tab in the HP Embedded Web Server.
Encryption support: HP High Performance Secure Hard Disks
The hard disk provides hardware-based encryption so you can securely store sensitive data without impacting
printer performance. This hard disk uses the latest Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and has versatile time-
saving features and robust functionality.
Use the Security menu in the HP Embedded Web Server to congure the disk.
Lock the formatter
The formatter has a slot that you can use to attach a security cable.
Locking the formatter prevents someone from removing valuable components from it.
ENWW Printer security features 195
Energy-conservation settings
Learn about the energy-conservation settings that are available for the printer.
●Set the sleep timer and congure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power
●Set the sleep schedule
●Set the idle settings
Set the sleep timer and congure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power
The sleep settings aect how much power the printer uses, the wake/sleep time, how quickly the printer enters
sleep mode, and how quickly the printer wakes up from sleep mode.
To congure the printer to use 1 watt or less of power while in sleep mode, enter times for both the Sleep after
Inactivity and Auto O after sleep settings.
NOTE: HP does not recommend using deep sleep settings if you have Security Solutions installed. In some
situations, the printer does not wake from deep sleep. For additional information, contact your HP
representative.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Energy Settings
c. Sleep Settings
3. Select Sleep after Inactivity to specify the number of minutes the printer is inactive before it enters sleep
mode. Enter the appropriate time period.
4. Select Auto O after sleep to put the printer into a deeper power save mode after a period of sleep. Enter
the appropriate time period.
NOTE: By default, the printer will wake from Auto O in response to any activity other than USB or Wi-Fi.
For greater energy settings, you can set it to wake only to the power button by selecting Shut down (wake
on power button only).
5. Select Done to save the settings.
Set the sleep schedule
Use the Sleep Schedule feature to congure the printer to automatically wake or go into Sleep mode at specic
times on specic days of the week.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
196 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
a. General
b. Energy Settings
c. Sleep Schedule
3. Select the New Event button, and then select the type of event to schedule: Wake Event or Sleep Event.
4. For a wake or sleep event, congure the time and the days of the week for the event. Select Save to save
the setting.
Set the idle settings
This setting aects energy use while the product is idle, not while in Sleep Mode. Start faster results in a quicker
rst-page-out time, but uses more power. Save energy conserves power, but could result in a slower rst-page-
out time.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, open the Settings menu.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Energy Settings
c. Idle Settings
3. Adjust the slider, and then select Done to save the setting.
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin is an award-winning, industry-leading tool for eiciently managing a wide variety of networked
HP products, including printers, multifunction printers, and digital senders. This single solution allows you to
remotely install, monitor, maintain, troubleshoot, and secure your printing and imaging environment —
ultimately increasing business productivity by helping you save time, control costs, and protect your investment.
HP Web Jetadmin upgrades are periodically made available to provide support for specic product features. Go to
www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin for more information.
Software and rmware updates
HP regularly updates features that are available in the printer rmware. To take advantage of the most current
features, update the printer rmware.
Download the most recent rmware update le from the web:
Go to www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP. Click Software, Drivers and Firmware.
ENWW HP Web Jetadmin 197
198 Chapter 8 Manage the printer ENWW
9 Solve problems
Troubleshoot problems with the printer. Locate additional resources for help and technical support.
●Customer support
●Control panel help system
●Reset factory settings
●A “Cartridge is low” or “Cartridge is very low” message displays on the printer control panel
●Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds
●Clear paper jams
●Resolving color print quality problems
●Improve copy image quality
●Improve scan image quality
●Improve fax image quality
●Solve wired network problems
●Solve wireless network problems
●Solve fax problems
For video assistance, see www.hp.com/videos/LaserJet.
The following information is correct at the time of publication. For current information, see www.hp.com/
support/colorljM776MFP.
For more information:
HP's all-inclusive help for the printer includes the following information:
●Install and congure
●Learn and use
●Solve problems
●Download software and rmware updates
●Join support forums
●Find warranty and regulatory information
ENWW 199
Customer support
Find support contact options for your HP printer.
Table 9-1 Customer support options
Support option Location
Get telephone support for your country/
region.
Have the printer name, serial number, date
of purchase, and problem description ready.
Country/region phone numbers are on the yer that was in the box with the printer or at
support.hp.com.
Get 24-hour Internet support, and
download software utilities and drivers.
www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP
Order additional HP service or maintenance
agreements.
www.hp.com/go/carepack
Register the printer. www.register.hp.com
Control panel help system
The printer has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system, touch the
Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen.
For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specic topics. You can browse
through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.
Some Help screens include animations that show specic procedures, such as clearing paper jams.
If the printer alerts of an error or warning, touch the Help button to open a message that describes the
problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.
200 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Reset factory settings
Resetting the printer settings to the factory-set defaults can help resolve problems.
●Introduction
●Method one: Reset factory settings from the printer control panel
●Method two: Reset factory settings from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-connected printers only)
Introduction
Use one of the following methods to reset the printer settings to the original settings from the factory.
Method one: Reset factory settings from the printer control panel
Use the printer control panel to restore the settings to their original values.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. General
b. Reset Factory Settings
3. Select Reset.
A verication message advises that completing the reset function might result in loss of data.
4. Select Reset to complete the process.
NOTE: The printer restarts automatically after the reset operation completes.
Method two: Reset factory settings from the HP Embedded Web Server (network-
connected printers only)
Use the HP EWS to reset the printer settings to the original settings.
1. On the printer control panel, select the Information button , and then select the Network icon to
display the IP address or host name.
2. Open the General tab.
3. On the left side of the screen, click Reset Factory Settings.
4. Click the Reset button.
NOTE: The printer restarts automatically after the reset operation completes.
ENWW Reset factory settings 201
A “Cartridge is low” or “Cartridge is very low” message displays on
the printer control panel
Review the possible solutions to this issue.
●Change the “Very Low” settings
●Order supplies
Cartridge is low: The printer indicates when a toner cartridge level is low. Actual toner cartridge life remaining
may vary. Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The toner
cartridge does not need to be replaced now.
Continue printing with the current cartridge until redistributing the toner no longer yields acceptable print quality.
To redistribute the toner, remove the toner cartridge from the printer and gently rock the cartridge back and forth
about its horizontal axis. For graphical representation, see cartridge replacement instructions. Reinsert the toner
cartridge into the printer and close the cover.
Cartridge is very low: The printer indicates when the toner cartridge level is very low. Actual toner cartridge life
remaining may vary. Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer
acceptable. The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer
acceptable.
HP’s Premium Protection Warranty expires near the end of useable cartridge life. Check the Supplies Status Page
or the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) for the status.
202 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Change the “Very Low” settings
You can change the way the printer reacts when supplies reach the Very Low state. You do not have to re-
establish these settings when you install a new cartridge.
●Change the “Very Low” settings at the control panel
●For printers with fax capability
Change the “Very Low” settings at the control panel
Change the setting at the printer control panel.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Manage Supplies
b. Very Low Behavior
c. Black Cartridge or Color Cartridges
3. Select one of the following options:
●Select the Stop option to set the printer to stop printing when the cartridge reaches the Very Low
threshold.
●Select the Prompt to continue option to set the printer to stop printing when the cartridge reaches the
Very Low threshold. You can acknowledge the prompt or replace the cartridge to resume printing.
●Select the Continue option to set the printer to alert you that the cartridge is very low, and to continue
printing beyond the Very Low setting without interaction. This can result in unsatisfactory print
quality.
For printers with fax capability
When the printer is set to the Stop or Prompt to continue option, there is some risk that faxes will not print when
the printer resumes printing. This can occur if the printer has received more faxes than the memory can hold
while the printer is waiting.
The printer can print faxes without interruption when it passes the Very Low threshold if you select the Continue
option for the cartridge, but print quality might degrade.
Order supplies
Order supplies and paper for your HP printer.
Table 9-2 Ordering options
Ordering option Ordering information
Order supplies and paper http://www.hp.com/go/SureSupply
ENWW A “Cartridge is low” or “Cartridge is very low” message displays on the printer control panel 203
Table 9-2 Ordering options (continued)
Ordering option Ordering information
Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your computer, enter the
printer IP address or host name in the address/URL eld. The EWS
contains a link to the HP SureSupply website, which provides
options for purchasing Original HP supplies.
204 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds
Use this information if the printer is not picking up paper from the tray or is picking up multiple sheets of paper
at one time.
●Introduction
●The printer does not pick up paper
●The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper
●The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper
Introduction
The following solutions can help solve problems if the printer is not picking up paper from the tray or is picking
up multiple sheets of paper at one time. Either of these situations can result in paper jams.
The printer does not pick up paper
If the printer does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions:
1. Open the printer and remove any jammed sheets of paper. Verify that no torn remnants of paper remain
inside the printer.
2. Load the tray with the correct size of paper for the job.
3. Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the printer control panel.
ENWW Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds 205
4. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the
appropriate indentation in the tray. The arrow on the tray guide should line up exactly with the marking on
the tray.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the indentations or
markings in the tray.
The following images show examples of the paper-size indentations in the trays for various printers. Most
HP printers have markings similar to these.
Figure 9-1 Size markings for Tray 1 or the multipurpose tray
Figure 9-2 Size markings for cassette trays
206 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
5. Verify that the humidity in the room is within specications for this printer and that paper is being stored in
unopened packages. Most reams of paper are sold in moisture-proof wrapping to keep paper dry.
In high-humidity environments, paper at the top of the stack in the tray can absorb moisture, and it might
have a wavy or uneven appearance. If this happens, remove the top 5 to 10 sheets of paper from the stack.
In low-humidity environments, excess static electricity can cause sheets of paper to stick together. If this
happens, remove the paper from the tray, and ex the stack by holding it at each end and bringing the ends
up to form a U shape. Then, rotate the ends down to reverse the U shape. Next, hold each side of the stack
of paper and repeat this process. This process releases individual sheets without introducing static
electricity. Straighten the paper stack against a table before returning it to the tray.
Figure 9-3 Technique for exing the paper stack
12
12
A4
A3
6. Check the printer control panel to see if it is displaying a prompt to feed the paper manually. Load paper,
and continue.
ENWW Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds 207
7. The rollers above the tray might be contaminated. Clean the rollers with a lint-free cloth dampened with
warm water. Use distilled water, if it is available.
CAUTION: Do not spray water directly onto the printer. Instead, spray water on the cloth or dab the cloth
in water and wring it out before cleaning the rollers.
The following image shows examples of the roller location for various printers.
Figure 9-4 Roller locations for Tray 1 or the multipurpose tray
The printer picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the printer picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions:
1. Remove the stack of paper from the tray and ex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and ip it over. Do not fan the
paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
NOTE: Fanning the paper introduces static electricity. Instead of fanning the paper, ex the stack by
holding it at each end and bringing the ends up to form a U shape. Then, rotate the ends down to reverse
the U shape. Next, hold each side of the stack of paper and repeat this process. This process releases
individual sheets without introducing static electricity. Straighten the paper stack against a table before
returning it to the tray.
208 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Figure 9-5 Technique for exing the paper stack
12
12
A4
A3
2. Use only paper that meets HP specications for this printer.
3. Verify that the humidity in the room is within specications for this printer, and that paper is being stored in
unopened packages. Most reams of paper are sold in moisture-proof wrapping to keep paper dry.
In high-humidity environments, paper at the top of the stack in the tray can absorb moisture, and it might
have a wavy or uneven appearance. If this happens, remove the top 5 to 10 sheets of paper from the stack.
In low-humidity environments, excess static electricity can cause sheets of paper to stick together. If this
happens, remove the paper from the tray and ex the stack as described above.
4. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a dierent package.
ENWW Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds 209
5. Make sure the tray is not overlled by checking the stack-height markings inside the tray. If it is overlled,
remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to
the tray.
The following examples show the stack-height markings in the trays for various printers. Most HP printers
have markings similar to these. Also make sure that all sheets of paper are below the tabs near the stack-
height marks. These tabs help hold the paper in the correct position as it enters the printer.
Figure 9-6 Stack-height markings
Figure 9-7 Tab for the paper stack
210 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
6. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides to the
appropriate indentation in the tray. The arrow on the tray guide should line up exactly with the marking on
the tray.
NOTE: Do not adjust the paper guides tightly against the paper stack. Adjust them to the indentations or
markings in the tray.
The following images show examples of the paper-size indentations in the trays for various printers. Most
HP printers have markings similar to these.
Figure 9-8 Size markings for Tray 1 or the multipurpose tray
Figure 9-9 Size markings for cassette trays
7. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specications.
ENWW Printer does not pick up paper or misfeeds 211
The document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the document feeder jams, skews, or picks up multiple sheets of paper, try these solutions.
NOTE: This information applies to MFP printers only.
●The original might have something on it, such as staples or self-adhesive notes, that must be removed.
●Check that all rollers are in place and that the roller-access cover inside the document feeder is closed.
●Make sure that the top document-feeder cover is closed.
●The pages might not be placed correctly. Straighten the pages and adjust the paper guides to center the
stack.
●The paper guides must be touching the sides of the paper stack to work correctly. Make sure that the paper
stack is straight and the guides are against the paper stack.
●The document feeder input tray or output bin might contain more than the maximum number of pages.
Make sure the paper stack ts below the guides in the input tray, and remove pages from the output bin.
●Verify that there are no pieces of paper, staples, paper clips, or other debris in the paper path.
●Clean the document-feeder rollers and the separation pad. Use compressed air or a clean, lint-free cloth
moistened with warm water. If misfeeds still occur, replace the rollers.
●From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Supplies button. Check the
status of the document-feeder kit, and replace it if necessary.
212 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Clear paper jams
Use the procedures in this section to clear jammed paper from the printer paper path.
●Introduction
●Paper jam locations
●Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams
●Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
●Clear paper jams in the document feeder - 31.13.yz
●Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1)
●Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2)
●Clear paper jams in the fuser (13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF)
●Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1)
●Clear paper jams in the duplex area (13.D3)
●Clear paper jams in the 550-sheet trays (13.A3, 13.A4)
●Clear paper jams in the 2 x 550 paper trays (13.A4, 13.A5)
●Clear paper jams in the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays (13.A3, 13.A4, 13.A5, 13.A7)
Introduction
The following information includes instructions for clearing paper jams from the printer.
Paper jam locations
Jams can occur in these locations.
ENWW Clear paper jams 213
1
3
4
5
2
Number Description
1 Output bin
2 Automatic document feeder (ADF)
3 Right door and fuser area
4 Tray 1
5 Tray 2
Auto-navigation for clearing paper jams
The auto-navigation feature assists in clearing jams by providing step-by-step instructions on the control panel.
When you complete a step, the printer displays instructions for the next step until you have completed all steps
in the procedure.
Experiencing frequent or recurring paper jams?
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
NOTE: View a video that demonstrates how to load paper in a way that reduces the number of paper jams.
1. Use only paper that meets HP specications for this printer.
2. Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a dierent package.
3. Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
4. Make sure the tray is not overlled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the
stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.
5. Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they
are touching the paper stack without bending it.
214 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
6. Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the printer.
7. If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed sheets
one at a time.
8. Open the Trays menu on the printer control panel. Verify that the tray is congured correctly for the paper
type and size.
9. Make sure the printing environment is within recommended specications.
Clear paper jams in the document feeder - 31.13.yz
The following information describes how to clear paper jams in the document feeder. When a jam occurs, the
control panel displays an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
1. Open the document-feeder cover.
ENWW Clear paper jams 215
2. Remove any jammed paper.
3. Close the document-feeder cover.
NOTE: To avoid jams, make sure the guides in the document-feeder input tray are adjusted against the
document, without bending the document. To copy narrow documents, use the atbed scanner. Remove all
staples and paper clips from original documents.
NOTE: Original documents that are printed on heavy, glossy paper can jam more frequently than originals that
are printed on plain paper.
Clear paper jams in Tray 1 (13.A1)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 1 and inside the right
door.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
●13.A1.XX Jam in Tray 1
216 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
1. If jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam
by gently pulling the paper straight out.
2. If you cannot remove the paper, or if no jammed
paper is visible in Tray 1, close Tray 1 and open the
right door.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller.
Contaminants can aect print quality.
3. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
ENWW Clear paper jams 217
4. Gently pull out any jammed paper in the duplex
area on the right door.
5. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser,
gently pull downward to remove it.
6. Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it
would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles,
squeeze the release levers, lift up slightly, and then
pull straight out to remove the fuser.
NOTE: The fuser can be hot while the
printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.
218 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
7. Open the jam-access door on the fuser. If paper is
jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up
to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper
fragments.
CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser
has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be
hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers.
8. If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin,
gently pull the paper out to remove it.
9. Close the jam-access door on the fuser, and push
the fuser completely into the printer until it clicks
into place.
ENWW Clear paper jams 219
10. Close the right door.
11. Open the upper-right door.
12. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
220 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
13. Close the upper-right door.
14. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the
leading edge and gently remove it.
Clear paper jams in Tray 2 (13.A2)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 and inside the right
door.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
●13.A2.XX Jam in tray 2
ENWW Clear paper jams 221
1. Open the tray and remove any jammed or
damaged sheets of paper. Verify that the tray is
not overlled and that the paper guides are
adjusted correctly.
2. Pull the tray completely out of the printer by
pulling and lifting it up slightly.
3. Gently remove any paper from the feed rollers
inside the printer. First pull the paper to the left to
release it, and then pull it forward to remove it.
222 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
4. Install and close the tray.
5. Open the upper-right door.
6. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
ENWW Clear paper jams 223
7. Close the upper-right door.
8. Open the right door.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller.
Contaminants can aect print quality.
9. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
224 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
10. Gently pull out any jammed paper in the duplex
area on the right door.
11. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser,
gently pull downward to remove it.
12. Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it
would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles,
squeeze the release levers, lift up slightly, and then
pull straight out to remove the fuser.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.
ENWW Clear paper jams 225
13. Open the jam-access door on the fuser. If paper is
jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up
to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper
fragments.
NOTE: Even if the body of the fuser has
cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be hot.
Do not touch the fuser rollers.
14. If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin,
gently pull the paper out to remove it.
15. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the
leading edge and gently remove it.
226 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
16. Close the jam-access door on the fuser, and push
the fuser completely into the printer until it clicks
into place.
17. Close the right door.
Clear paper jams in the fuser (13.B9, 13.B2, 13.FF)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
●13.B9.XX Jam in fuser
●13.B2.XX Jam in <Cover or Door>.
●13.FF.EE Door Open Jam
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
ENWW Clear paper jams 227
1. Open the right door.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller.
Contaminants can aect print quality.
2. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
3. Gently pull out any jammed paper in the duplex
area on the right door.
228 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
4. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser,
gently pull downward to remove it.
5. Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it
would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles,
squeeze the release levers, lift up slightly, and then
pull straight out to remove the fuser.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.
6. Open the jam-access door on the fuser. If paper is
jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up
to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper
fragments.
CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser
has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be
hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers.
ENWW Clear paper jams 229
7. If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin,
gently pull the paper out to remove it.
8. Close the jam-access door on the fuser, and push
the fuser completely into the printer until it clicks
into place.
9. Close the right door.
230 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
10. Open the upper-right door.
11. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
ENWW Clear paper jams 231
12. Close the upper-right door.
13. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the
leading edge and gently remove it.
Clear paper jams in the output bin (13.E1)
Use the following procedure to clear jams in the output bin.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
●13.E1.XX Jam at standard output bin
232 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
1. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the
leading edge and gently remove it.
2. Open the upper-right door.
ENWW Clear paper jams 233
3. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
4. Close the upper-right door.
Clear paper jams in the duplex area (13.D3)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations inside the right door.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
●13.D3.XX Jam in duplex area
234 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
1. Open the right door.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller.
Contaminants can aect print quality.
2. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
3. Gently pull out any jammed paper in the duplex
area on the right door.
ENWW Clear paper jams 235
4. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser,
gently pull downward to remove it.
5. Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it
would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles,
squeeze the release levers, lift up slightly, and then
pull straight out to remove the fuser.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.
6. Open the jam-access door on the fuser. If paper is
jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up
to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper
fragments.
CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser
has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be
hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers.
236 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
7. If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin,
gently pull the paper out to remove it.
8. Close the jam-access door on the fuser, and push
the fuser completely into the printer until it clicks
into place.
9. Close the right door.
ENWW Clear paper jams 237
10. Open the upper-right door.
11. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
238 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
12. Close the upper-right door.
13. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the
leading edge and gently remove it.
Clear paper jams in the 550-sheet trays (13.A3, 13.A4)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 550-sheet trays and
inside the right door.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
●13.A3.XX Jam in tray 3
●13.A4.XX Jam in tray 4
ENWW Clear paper jams 239
1. Open the tray and remove any jammed or
damaged sheets of paper. Verify that the tray is
not overlled and that the paper guides are
adjusted correctly.
2. Release two tabs at the back of the tray, and then
pull the tray completely out of the printer.
3. Remove any paper from the feed rollers inside the
printer. First pull the paper to the left to release it,
and then pull it forward to remove it.
240 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
4. Install and close the tray.
5. Open the lower-right door.
6. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
ENWW Clear paper jams 241
7. Close the lower-right door.
8. Open the right door.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller.
Contaminants can aect print quality.
9. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
242 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
10. Gently pull out any jammed paper in the duplex
area on the right door.
11. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser,
gently pull downward to remove it.
12. Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it
would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles,
squeeze the release levers, lift up slightly, and then
pull straight out to remove the fuser.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.
ENWW Clear paper jams 243
13. Open the jam-access door on the fuser. If paper is
jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up
to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper
fragments.
NOTE: Even if the body of the fuser has
cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be hot.
Do not touch the fuser rollers.
14. If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin,
gently pull the paper out to remove it.
15. Close the jam-access door on the fuser, and push
the fuser completely into the printer until it clicks
into place.
244 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
16. Close the right door.
17. Open the upper-right door.
18. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
ENWW Clear paper jams 245
19. Close the upper-right door.
20. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the
leading edge and gently remove it.
Clear paper jams in the 2 x 550 paper trays (13.A4, 13.A5)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 2 x 550-sheet trays
and inside the right door.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
●13.A4.XX Jam in tray 4
●13.A5.XX Jam in tray 5
246 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
1. Open the tray and remove any jammed or
damaged sheets of paper. Verify that the tray is
not overlled and that the paper guides are
adjusted correctly.
2. Release two tabs at the back of the tray, and then
pull the tray completely out of the printer.
3. Remove the jammed paper from the feed rollers
inside the printer. First pull the paper to the left,
and then pull it forward to remove it.
ENWW Clear paper jams 247
4. Open the lower-right door.
5. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
6. Close the lower-right door, and then install and
close the tray.
248 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
7. Open the right door.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller.
Contaminants can aect print quality.
8. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
9. Gently pull out any jammed paper in the duplex
area on the right door.
ENWW Clear paper jams 249
10. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser,
gently pull downward to remove it.
11. Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it
would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles,
squeeze the release levers, lift up slightly, and then
pull straight out to remove the fuser.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.
12. Open the jam-access door on the fuser. If paper is
jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up
to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper
fragments.
CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser
has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be
hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers.
250 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
13. If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin,
gently pull the paper out to remove it.
14. Close the jam-access door on the fuser, and push
the fuser completely into the printer until it clicks
into place.
15. Close the right door.
ENWW Clear paper jams 251
16. Open the upper-right door.
17. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
252 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
18. Close the upper-right door.
19. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the
leading edge and gently remove it.
Clear paper jams in the 2,700-sheet high-capacity input paper trays (13.A3, 13.A4,
13.A5, 13.A7)
Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the 2,700-sheet high-
capacity input (HCI) paper tray and inside the right door.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.
ENWW Clear paper jams 253
1. Release the tray latch on the left HCI tray. Slide the
tray away from the printer until it stops, and then
lift it up and away from the printer to remove it.
2. Remove any jammed paper from the feed rollers
inside the printer. First pull the paper to the left,
and then pull it forward to remove it.
3. Install and close the left HCI tray.
254 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
4. Release the tray latch on the right HCI tray. Slide
the tray away from the printer until it stops, and
then lift it up and away from the printer to remove
it.
5. Remove any jammed paper from the feed rollers
inside the printer. First pull the paper to the left,
and then pull it forward to remove it.
6. Open the lower-right door.
ENWW Clear paper jams 255
7. Remove any damaged sheets.
8. Close the lower-right door, and then install and
close the right HCI tray.
9. Open the right door.
CAUTION: Do not touch the transfer roller.
Contaminants can aect print quality.
256 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
10. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
11. Gently pull out any jammed paper in the duplex
area on the right door.
12. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser,
gently pull downward to remove it.
ENWW Clear paper jams 257
13. Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it
would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles,
squeeze the release levers, lift up slightly, and then
pull straight out to remove the fuser.
CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the
printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before
handling it.
14. Open the jam-access door on the fuser. If paper is
jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up
to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper
fragments.
CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser
has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be
hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers.
15. If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin,
gently pull the paper out to remove it.
258 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
16. Close the jam-access door on the fuser, and push
the fuser completely into the printer until it clicks
into place.
17. Close the right door.
18. Open the upper-right door.
ENWW Clear paper jams 259
19. Gently pull out any jammed paper.
20. Close the upper-right door.
21. If paper is visible in the output bin, grasp the
leading edge and gently remove it.
260 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Resolving color print quality problems
Use the information below to troubleshoot print-quality, color-quality, and image-quality problems on HP Color
LaserJet Enterprise printers.
●Introduction
●Troubleshoot print quality
●Troubleshoot color quality
●Troubleshoot image defects
Introduction
The troubleshooting steps can help resolve the following defects:
●Blank pages
●Black pages
●Colors that do not align
●Curled paper
●Dark or light bands
●Dark or light streaks
●Fuzzy print
●Gray background or dark print
●Light print
●Loose toner
●Missing toner
●Scattered dots of toner
●Skewed images
●Smears
●Streaks
ENWW Resolving color print quality problems 261
Troubleshoot print quality
To resolve print-quality issues, try these steps in the order presented.
●Update the printer rmware
●Print from a dierent software program
●Check the paper-type setting for the print job
●Check toner-cartridge status
●Print a cleaning page
●Visually inspect the toner cartridge or cartridges
●Check paper and the printing environment
●Try a dierent print driver
To troubleshoot specic image defects, see Troubleshoot image defects.
Update the printer rmware
Try upgrading the printer rmware.
For instructions, go to www.hp.com/support.
Print from a dierent software program
Try printing from a dierent software program.
If the page prints correctly, the problem is with the software program from which you were printing.
262 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Check the paper-type setting for the print job
Check the paper type setting when printing from a software program and the printed pages have smears, fuzzy
or dark print, curled paper, scattered dots of toner, loose toner, or small areas of missing toner.
●Check the paper type setting on the printer
●Check the paper type setting (Windows)
●Check the paper type setting (macOS)
Check the paper type setting on the printer
Check the paper type setting on the printer control panel, and change the setting as needed.
1. Open the tray.
2. Verify that the tray is loaded with the correct type of paper.
3. Close the tray.
4. Follow the control panel instructions to conrm or modify the paper type settings for the tray.
Check the paper type setting (Windows)
Check the paper type setting for Windows, and change the setting as needed.
1. From the software program, select the Print option.
2. Select the printer, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3. Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4. From the Paper Type drop-down list, click the More... option.
5. Expand the list of Type is: options.
6. Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.
7. Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.
8. Click the OK button to close the Document Properties dialog box. In the Print dialog box, click the OK button
to print the job.
Check the paper type setting (macOS)
Check the paper type setting for macOS, and change the setting as needed.
1. Click the File menu, and then click the Print option.
2. In the Printer menu, select the printer.
3. By default, the print driver displays the Copies & Pages menu. Open the menus drop-down list, and then
click the Finishing menu.
4. Select a type from the Media Type drop-down list.
5. Click the Print button.
ENWW Resolving color print quality problems 263
Check toner-cartridge status
Follow these steps to check the estimated life remaining in the toner cartridges and if applicable, the status of
other replaceable maintenance parts.
●Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page
●Step two: Check supplies status
Step one: Print the Supplies Status Page
The supplies status page indicates the cartridge status.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Reports menu.
2. Select the Conguration/Status Pages menu.
3. Select Supplies Status Page, and then select Print to print the page.
Step two: Check supplies status
Check the supplies status report as follows.
1. Look at the supplies status report to check the percent of life remaining for the toner cartridges and, if
applicable, the status of other replaceable maintenance parts.
Print quality problems can occur when using a toner cartridge that is at its estimated end of life. The
supplies status page indicates when a supply level is very low. After an HP supply has reached the very low
threshold, HP’s premium protection warranty on that supply has ended.
The toner cartridge does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable.
Consider having a replacement available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
If you determine that you need to replace a toner cartridge or other replaceable maintenance parts, the
supplies status page lists the genuine HP part numbers.
2. Check to see if you are using a genuine HP cartridge.
A genuine HP toner cartridge has the word “HP” on it, or has the HP logo on it. For more information on
identifying HP cartridges go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
Print a cleaning page
During the printing process paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer and can cause print-
quality issues such as toner specks or spatter, smears, streaks, lines, or repeating marks.
Follow these steps to clean the printer paper path:
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
2. Select the following menus:
264 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
a. Maintenance
b. Calibration/Cleaning
c. Cleaning Page
3. Select Print to print the page.
A Cleaning... message displays on the printer control panel. The cleaning process takes a few minutes to
complete. Do not turn the printer o until the cleaning process has nished. When it is nished, discard the
printed page.
Visually inspect the toner cartridge or cartridges
Follow these steps to inspect each toner cartridge:
1. Remove the toner cartridge from the printer, and verify that the sealing tape has been removed.
2. Check the memory chip for damage.
3. Examine the surface of the green imaging drum.
CAUTION: Do not touch the imaging drum. Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-quality
problems.
4. If you see any scratches, ngerprints, or other damage on the imaging drum, replace the toner cartridge.
5. Reinstall the toner cartridge and print a few pages to see if the problem has resolved.
ENWW Resolving color print quality problems 265
Check paper and the printing environment
Use the following information to check the paper selection and the printing environment.
●Step one: Use paper that meets HP specications
●Step two: Check the environment
●Step three: Set the individual tray alignment
Step one: Use paper that meets HP specications
Some print-quality problems arise from using paper that does not meet HP specications.
●Always use a paper type and weight that this printer supports.
●Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids,
staples, and curled or bent edges.
●Use paper that has not been previously printed on.
●Use paper that does not contain metallic material, such as glitter.
●Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use in Inkjet
printers.
●Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.
Step two: Check the environment
The environment can directly aect print quality and is a common cause of print-quality or paper-feeding issues.
Try the following solutions:
●Move the printer away from drafty locations, such as open windows or doors, or air-conditioning vents.
●Make sure the printer is not exposed to temperatures or humidity outside of printer specications.
●Do not place the printer in a conned space, such as a cabinet.
●Place the printer on a sturdy, level surface.
●Remove anything that is blocking the vents on the printer. The printer requires good air ow on all sides,
including the top.
●Protect the printer from airborne debris, dust, steam, grease, or other elements that can leave residue
inside the printer.
Step three: Set the individual tray alignment
Follow these steps when text or images are not centered or aligned correctly on the printed page when printing
from specic trays.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.
2. Select the following menus:
266 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
a. Copy/Print or Print
b. Print Quality
c. Image Registration
3. Select Tray, and then select the tray to adjust.
4. Select Print Test Page, and then follow the instructions on the printed pages.
5. Select Print Test Page again to verify the results, and then make further adjustments if necessary.
6. Select Done to save the new settings.
Try a dierent print driver
Try a dierent print driver when printing from a software program and the printed pages have unexpected lines
in graphics, missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.
Download any of the following drivers from the HP Web site: www.hp.com/support/colorljM776MFP.
Table 9-3 Print drivers
Driver Description
HP PCL.6 driver If available, this printer-specic print driver supports older operating systems like Windows
XP and Windows Vista. For a list of supported operating systems, go to www.hp.com/go/
support.
HP PCL 6 driver This printer-specic print driver supports Windows 7 and newer operating systems that
support version 3 drivers. For a list of supported operating systems, go to www.hp.com/go/
support.
HP PCL-6 driver This product-specic print driver supports Windows 8 and newer operating systems that
support version 4 drivers. For a list of supported operating systems, go to www.hp.com/go/
support.
HP UPD PS driver ●Recommended for printing with Adobe software programs or with other highly
graphics-intensive software programs
●Provides support for printing from Postscript emulation needs, or for Postscript ash
font support
HP UPD PCL 6 ●Recommended for printing in all Windows environments
●Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer feature support for most
users
●Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for best speed in
Windows environments
●Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are
based on PCL 5
ENWW Resolving color print quality problems 267
Troubleshoot color quality
Calibrating the printer can help ensure color print quality.
●Calibrate the printer to align the colors
Calibrate the printer to align the colors
Calibration is a printer function that optimizes print quality.
Follow these steps to resolve print-quality problems such as misaligned color, colored shadows, blurry graphics,
or other print-quality issues.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.
2. Select the following menus:
●Maintenance
●Calibration/Cleaning
●Full Calibration
3. Select Start to start the calibration process.
A Calibrating message will display on the printer control panel. The calibration process takes a few minutes
to complete. Do not turn the printer o until the calibration process has nished.
4. Wait while the printer calibrates, and then try printing again.
Troubleshoot image defects
Review examples of image defects and steps to resolve these defects.
Table 9-4 Image defects table quick reference
Defect Defect Defect
Table 9-12 Light print on page 274 Table 9-10 Gray background or dark print
on page 273
Table 9-7 Blank page — No print on page 271
268 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Table 9-4 Image defects table quick reference (continued)
Defect Defect Defect
Table 9-6 Black page on page 271 Table 9-5 Banding defects on page 270 Table 9-14 Streak defects on page 276
Table 9-9 Fixing/fuser defects on page 272 Table 9-11 Image placement defects
on page 273
Table 9-8 Color plane registrations defects (color
models only) on page 272
Table 9-13 Output defects on page 275
Image defects, no matter the cause, can often be resolved using the same steps. Use the following steps as a
starting point for solving image defect issues.
ENWW Resolving color print quality problems 269
1. Reprint the document. Print quality defects can be intermittent in nature or can go away completely with
continued printing.
2. Check the condition of the cartridge or cartridges. If a cartridge is in a Very Low state (it has passed the
rated life), replace the cartridge.
3. Make sure that the driver and tray print mode settings match the media that is loaded in the tray. Try using
a dierent ream of media or a dierent tray. Try using a dierent print mode.
4. Make sure the printer is within the supported operating temperature/humidity range.
5. Make sure that the paper type, size, and weight are supported by the printer. See the printer support page
at support.hp.com for a list of the supported paper sizes and types for the printer.
NOTE: The term "fusing" refers to the part of the printing process where toner is aixed to paper.
The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the printer with the short edge rst.
Table 9-5 Banding defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Dark or light lines which repeat down the
length of the page, and are wide-pitch
and/or impulse bands. They might be sharp
or soft in nature. The defect displays only in
areas of ll, not in text or sections with no
printed content.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Try printing from another tray.
3. Replace the cartridge.
4. Use a dierent paper type.
5. Enterprise models only: From the
Home screen on the printer control
panel, go to the Adjust Paper Types
menu, and then choose a print mode
that is designed for a slightly heavier
media than what you are using. This
slows the print speed and might
improve the print quality.
6. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
270 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Table 9-6 Black page
Sample Description Possible solutions
The entire printed page is black.
1. Visually inspect the cartridge to check
for damage.
2. Make sure that the cartridge is
installed correctly.
3. Replace the cartridge.
4. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-7 Blank page — No print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The page is completely blank and contains
no printed content. 1. Make sure that the cartridges are
genuine HP cartridges.
2. Make sure that the cartridge is
installed correctly.
3. Print with a dierent cartridge.
4. Check the paper type in the paper tray
and adjust the printer settings to
match. If necessary, select a lighter
paper type.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
ENWW Resolving color print quality problems 271
Table 9-8 Color plane registrations defects (color models only)
Sample Description Possible solutions
One or more color plane(s) is not aligned
with the other color planes. This registration
error will typically occur with yellow.
1. Reprint the document.
2. From the printer control panel,
calibrate the printer.
3. If a cartridge has reached a Very Low
state, or the printed output is severely
faded, replace the cartridge.
4. From the printer control panel use the
Restore Calibration feature to reset
the printer's calibration settings to the
factory defaults.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-9 Fixing/fuser defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Slight shadows or osets of the image are
repeated down the page. The repeated
image might fade with each recurrence.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Check the paper type in the paper tray
and adjust the printer settings to
match. If necessary, select a lighter
paper type.
3. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Toner rubs o along either edge of the
page. This defect is more common at the
edges of high-coverage jobs, and on light
media types, but can occur anywhere on the
page.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Check the paper type in the paper tray
and adjust the printer settings to
match. If necessary, select a heavier
paper type.
3. Enterprise models only: From the
printer control panel, go to the Edge-
to-Edge menu and then select Normal.
Reprint the document.
4. Enterprise models only: From the
printer control panel, select Auto
Include Margins and then reprint the
document.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
272 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Table 9-10 Gray background or dark print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The image or text is darker than expected
and/or the background is gray. 1. Make sure that the paper in the trays
has not already been run through the
printer.
2. Use a dierent paper type.
3. Reprint the document.
4. Mono models only: From the Home
screen on the printer control panel, go
to the Adjust Toner Density menu, and
then adjust the toner density to a
lower level.
5. Make sure that the printer is within the
supported operating temperature and
humidity range.
6. Replace the cartridge.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
Table 9-11 Image placement defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
The image is not centered, or is skewed on
the page. The defect occurs when the paper
is not positioned properly as it is pulled from
the tray and moves through the paper path.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the paper and then reload the
tray. Make sure that all the paper
edges are even on all sides.
3. Make sure that the top of the paper
stack is below the tray-full indicator.
Do not overll the tray.
4. Make sure that the paper guides are
adjusted to the correct size for the
paper. Do not adjust the paper guides
tightly against the paper stack. Adjust
them to the indentations or markings
in the tray.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
ENWW Resolving color print quality problems 273
Table 9-12 Light print
Sample Description Possible solutions
The printed content is light or faded on the
entire page. 1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake
it to redistribute the toner.
3. Mono models only: Make sure that the
EconoMode setting is disabled, both at
the printer control panel and in the
print driver.
4. Make sure that the cartridge is
installed correctly.
5. Print a Supplies Status Page and check
the life and usage of the cartridge.
6. Replace the cartridge.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
274 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Table 9-13 Output defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Printed pages have curled edges. The curled
edge can be along the short or long side of
the paper. Two types of curl are possible:
●Positive curl: The paper curls toward
the printed side. The defect occurs in
dry environments or when printing
high-coverage pages.
●Negative curl: The paper curls away
from the printed side. The defect
occurs in high-humidity environments
or when printing low-coverage pages.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Positive curl: From the printer control
panel, select a heavier paper type. The
heavier paper type creates a higher
temperature for printing.
Negative curl: From the printer control
panel, select a lighter paper type. The
lighter paper type creates a lower
temperature for printing. Try storing
the paper in a dry environment prior to
use, or use freshly opened paper.
3. Print in duplex mode.
4. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
The paper does not stack well in the output
tray. The stack might be uneven, skewed, or
the pages might be pushed out of the tray
and onto the oor. Any of the following
conditions can cause this defect:
●Extreme paper curl
●The paper in the tray is wrinkled or
deformed
●The paper is a non-standard paper
type, such as envelopes
●The output tray is too full
1. Reprint the document.
2. Extend the output bin extension.
3. If the defect is caused by extreme
paper curl, refer to the
troubleshooting steps for "Output
curl."
4. Use a dierent paper type.
5. Use freshly opened paper.
6. Remove the paper from the output
tray before the tray gets too full.
7. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
ENWW Resolving color print quality problems 275
Table 9-14 Streak defects
Sample Description Possible solutions
Light vertical streaks that usually span the
length of the page. The defect displays only
in areas of ll, not in text or sections with no
printed content.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake
it to redistribute the toner.
3. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
NOTE: Both light and dark vertical streaks
can occur when the printing environment is
outside the specied range for temperature
or humidity. Refer to your printer's
environmental specications for allowable
temperature and humidity levels.
Dark vertical lines which occur down the
length of the page. The defect might occur
anywhere on the page, in areas of ll or in
sections with no printed content. On color
models, these lines or streaks will also be
visible on the ITB cleaning page.
1. Reprint the document.
2. Remove the cartridge, and then shake
it to redistribute the toner.
3. Print a cleaning page.
4. Check the toner level in the cartridge.
5. If the issue persists, go to
support.hp.com.
276 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Improve copy image quality
If the printer is having copy quality problems, try the following solutions in the order presented to resolve the
issue.
●Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
●Calibrate the scanner
●Check the paper settings
●Check the image-adjustment settings
●Optimize copy quality for text or pictures
●Edge-to-edge copying
Try these few simple steps rst:
●Use the atbed scanner rather than the document feeder.
●Use high-quality originals.
●When using the document feeder, load the original document into the feeder correctly, using the paper
guides, to avoid unclear or skewed images.
If the problem still exists, try these additional solutions. If they do not x the problem, see “Improve print quality”
for further solutions.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can aect
performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have streaks, unwanted
lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer o, and
then disconnect the power cable from the electrical
outlet.
ENWW Improve copy image quality 277
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the
document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a
soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with
nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone,
benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can
damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on
the glass or platen. They might seep and damage
the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on
copies when you are using the document feeder,
be sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left
side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
3
2
1
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a
chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then
press the power button to turn the printer on.
Calibrate the scanner
Calibration is a process that optimizes scan quality.
NOTE: When using the document feeder, make sure to adjust the guides in the input tray so they are against
the original document.
278 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Support Tools application, and then
select the Support Tools icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Maintenance
b. Calibration/Cleaning
c. Calibrate Scanner
3. Touch the Start button to start the calibration process. Follow the on-screen prompts.
4. Wait while the printer calibrates, and then try copying again.
ENWW Improve copy image quality 279
Check the paper settings
Follow these steps if copied pages have smears, fuzzy or dark print, curled paper, or areas where pigment has
dropped out.
●Check the paper selection options
Check the paper selection options
Use the following steps to check the paper selection options.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then scroll to and select Paper Selection.
3. Select Paper size, and then select one of the predened options.
4. Select Paper type, and then select one of the predened options.
5. Select Paper tray, and then select one of the predened options.
6. Select Done to save the paper selection options.
Check the image-adjustment settings
Adjust the settings in the Copy menu to optimize image quality.
●Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.
●Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.
●Contrast: Increase or decrease the dierence between the lightest and the darkest color on the page.
●Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if the
original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background without aecting
the darkness of the image.
●Automatic Tone: Available for Flow printers only. The printer automatically adjusts the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then scroll to and select Image Adjustment.
3. Adjust the sliders to set the levels, and select Done.
4. Select Copy to start the copy job.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default settings.
Optimize copy quality for text or pictures
Optimize the copy job for the type of image being copied: text, graphics, or photos.
280 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then select Optimize Text/Picture.
3. Select one of the predened options.
4. Select Copy to start the copy job.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default settings.
Edge-to-edge copying
Use this feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original document is
printed close to the edges.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Copy application, and then select the
Copy icon.
2. Select Options, and then select Edge-To-Edge.
3. Select the Edge-To-Edge output option if the original document is printed close to the paper edges.
4. Select Copy to start the copy job.
ENWW Improve copy image quality 281
Improve scan image quality
Try the following basic solutions to improve scanned image quality.
●Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
●Check the resolution settings
●Check the color settings
●Check the image-adjustment settings
●Optimize scan quality for text or pictures
●Check the output-quality settings
●Use the atbed scanner rather than the document feeder.
●Use high-quality originals.
●When using the document feeder, load the original document into the feeder correctly, using the paper
guides, to avoid unclear or skewed images.
If the problem still exists, try these additional solutions. If they do not x the problem, see “Improve print quality”
for further solutions.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can aect
performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have streaks, unwanted
lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer o, and
then disconnect the power cable from the electrical
outlet.
2. Open the scanner lid.
282 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the
document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a
soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with
nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone,
benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can
damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on
the glass or platen. They might seep and damage
the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on
copies when you are using the document feeder,
be sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left
side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
3
2
1
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a
chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then
press the power button to turn the printer on.
Check the resolution settings
Follow these steps to adjust the resolution setting. Setting the resolution to a high value increases the le size
and the scan time.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select the
Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
●Scan to Email
●Scan to Network Folder
●Scan to USB Drive
●Scan to SharePoint®
3. Select Options, and then select File Type and Resolution.
4. Select one of the predened Resolution options, and then select Done.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
ENWW Improve scan image quality 283
Check the color settings
Follow these steps to adjust the color setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select the
Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
●Save to Device Memory
●Scan to Email
●Scan to Network Folder
●Scan to USB
●Scan to SharePoint®
3. Touch the Options button.
4. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Color/Black.
5. Select one of the predened options.
6. Touch the Send button.
Check the image-adjustment settings
Adjust the settings in the Scan menu to optimize image quality.
●Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.
●Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.
●Contrast: Increase or decrease the dierence between the lightest and the darkest color on the page.
●Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if the
original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background without aecting
the darkness of the image.
●Automatic Tone: Available for Flow printers only. The printer automatically adjusts the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select the
Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
●Scan to Email
●Scan to Network Folder
●Scan to USB Drive
●Scan to Job Storage
●Scan to SharePoint®
284 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
3. Select Options, and then select Image Adjustment.
4. Adjust the sliders to set the levels, and then select Done.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default settings.
Optimize scan quality for text or pictures
Optimize the scan job for the type of image being scanned: text, graphics, or photos.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select the
Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
●Scan to Email
●Scan to Network Folder
●Scan to USB Drive
●Scan to Job Storage
●Scan to SharePoint®
3. Select Options, and then select Optimize Text/Picture.
4. Select one of the predened options.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default settings.
Check the output-quality settings
This setting adjusts the level of compression when saving the le. For the highest quality, select the highest
setting.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Scan application, and then select the
Scan icon.
2. Select one of the following Scan features:
●Scan to Email
●Scan to Network Folder
●Scan to USB Drive
●Scan to SharePoint®
3. Select Options, and then select File Type and Resolution.
4. Select one of the predened Quality and File Size options, and then select Done.
5. Select Send or Save to start the scan.
ENWW Improve scan image quality 285
Improve fax image quality
If the printer is having fax quality problems, try the following solutions in the order presented to resolve the
issue.
●Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
●Check the send-fax resolution settings
●Check the image-adjustment settings
●Optimize fax quality for text or pictures
●Check the error-correction setting
●Check the t-to-page setting
●Send to a dierent fax machine
●Check the sender's fax machine
Try these few simple steps rst:
●Use the atbed scanner rather than the document feeder.
●Use high-quality originals.
●When using the document feeder, load the original document into the feeder correctly, using the paper
guides, to avoid unclear or skewed images.
If the problem still exists, try these additional solutions. If they do not x the problem, see “Improve print quality”
for further solutions.
Check the scanner glass for dirt and smudges
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can aect
performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner if the printed pages have streaks, unwanted
lines, black dots, poor print quality, or unclear text.
1. Press the power button to turn the printer o, and
then disconnect the power cable from the electrical
outlet.
286 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) and the
document feeder strips (callout 2, callout 3) with a
soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with
nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone,
benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the printer; these can
damage the printer. Do not place liquids directly on
the glass or platen. They might seep and damage
the printer.
NOTE: If you are having trouble with streaks on
copies when you are using the document feeder,
be sure to clean the small strips of glass on the left
side of the scanner (callout 2, callout 3).
3
2
1
4. Dry the glass and white plastic parts with a
chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
5. Connect the power cable to an outlet, and then
press the power button to turn the printer on.
Check the send-fax resolution settings
Adjust the resolution of outgoing faxes as needed. A higher resolution setting increases the fax size and send
time.
ENWW Improve fax image quality 287
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select the Fax
icon.
2. Select Options.
3. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Resolution.
4. Select one of the predened options, and then select Send to send the fax.
Check the image-adjustment settings
Adjust the settings in the Fax menu to optimize image quality.
●Sharpness: Clarify or soften the image. For example, increasing the sharpness could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it could make photos appear smoother.
●Darkness: Increase or decrease the amount of white and black used in colors in scanned images.
●Contrast: Increase or decrease the dierence between the lightest and the darkest color on the page.
●Background Cleanup: Remove faint colors from the background of scanned images. For example, if the
original document is printed on colored paper, use this feature to lighten the background without aecting
the darkness of the image.
●Automatic Tone: Available for Flow printers only. The printer automatically adjusts the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup settings to the most appropriate for the scanned document.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select the Fax
icon.
2. Select Options.
3. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Image Adjustment.
4. Adjust the sliders to set the levels, and then select Done.
5. Select Send to send the fax.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default settings.
Optimize fax quality for text or pictures
Optimize the fax job for the type of image being scanned: text, graphics, or photos.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Fax application, and then select the Fax
icon.
2. Select Options.
3. In the Options pane, scroll to and select Optimize Text/Picture.
4. Select one of the predened options.
5. Select Send to send the fax.
NOTE: These settings are temporary. After you have nished the job, the printer returns to the default settings.
288 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Check the error-correction setting
Make sure the Error Correction Mode setting is enabled. This setting can improve image quality.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Send Settings
c. General Fax Send Settings
3. Select the Error Correction Mode option. Touch the Done button.
Check the t-to-page setting
If the Fit to Page setting is enabled, and the incoming fax is larger than the default page size, the printer
attempts to scale the image to t the page. If this setting is disabled, larger images split across multiple pages.
1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, navigate to the Settings application, and then select
the Settings icon.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Fax
b. Fax Receive Settings
c. Default Job Options
d. Fit to Page
3. Select the On option to enable the setting, or select the O option to disable it.
Send to a dierent fax machine
The problem might be related to fax machine settings or supplies status.
Try sending the fax to a dierent fax machine. If the fax quality is better, the problem is related to the initial
recipient's fax machine settings or supplies status.
Check the sender's fax machine
Try the following to check the sender's fax machine.
Ask the sender to try sending from a dierent fax machine. If the fax quality is better, the problem is with the
sender's fax machine. If a dierent fax machine is unavailable, ask the sender to consider making the following
changes:
●Make sure the original document is on white (not colored) paper.
●Increase the fax resolution, quality level, or contrast settings.
●If possible, send the fax from a computer software program.
ENWW Improve fax image quality 289
Solve wired network problems
Check the following information to resolve wired network issues.
●Introduction
●Poor physical connection
●The computer is unable to communicate with the printer
●The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
●New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
●The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
●The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
Introduction
Certain types of problems can indicate there is a network communication problem. These problems include the
following issues:
Poor physical connection
Check the cable connections.
1. Verify that the printer is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.
2. Verify that cable connections are secure.
3. Look at the network port connection on the back of the printer, and verify that the amber activity light
ashes indicating network traic, and the green link-status light is continuously lit indicating a network link.
4. If the problem continues, try a dierent cable or port on the hub.
The computer is unable to communicate with the printer
Verify that the printer is communicating with the network and your computer.
1. Test network communication by pinging the network.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.
●For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.
●For macOS, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.
b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your printer.
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
2. If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network settings,
the printer, and the computer are all congured for the same network (also known as subnet).
3. Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the printer is
selected. The printer IP address is listed on the printer conguration page.
290 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
4. If you installed the printer using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always print to this
printer, even if its IP address changes.
5. If you installed the printer using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the printer’s hostname instead of the
IP address.
6. If the IP address is correct, delete the printer and then add it again.
7. Reinstall the printer software and driver.
The printer is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
HP recommends leaving these settings in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these settings, you
must also change them for your network.
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct print driver.
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
An incorrectly congured computer can cause issues with printing.
1. Check the network drivers, print drivers, and the network redirection settings.
2. Verify that the operating system is congured correctly.
The printer is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
Check the network settings.
1. Review the printer’s conguration/networking pages to check the status of the network settings and
protocols.
2. Recongure the network settings if necessary.
ENWW Solve wired network problems 291
Solve wireless network problems
Check the following information to resolve wireless network issues.
●Introduction
●Wireless connectivity checklist
●The printer does not print after the wireless conguration completes
●The printer does not print, and the computer has a third-party rewall installed
●The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or printer
●Cannot connect more computers to the wireless printer
●The wireless printer loses communication when connected to a VPN
●The network does not appear in the wireless networks list
●The wireless network is not functioning
●Reduce interference on a wireless network
Introduction
Use the troubleshooting information to help resolve issues.
NOTE: To determine whether HP NFC, Wi-Fi, BLE, or other wireless printing capabilities are enabled on the
printer, print a conguration page from the printer control panel.
NOTE: If you have been experiencing intermittent loss of network connectivity, rst update the printer
rmware. For instructions on how to update the printer rmware, go to http://support.hp.com, search for your
printer, and then search on “update the rmware.”
Wireless connectivity checklist
Use the checklist to help resolve wireless connection issues.
●For printers that do not support simultaneous wired and wireless connections, verify that the network cable
is not connected.
●Verify that the printer and the wireless router are turned on and have power. Also make sure that the
wireless radio in the printer is turned on. (The wireless network indicator is solid when the printer is
connected to a wireless network, and blinking when it is searching for a wireless network.)
●Verify that the service set identier (SSID) is correct:
–For a wireless connection to your network, conrm that your mobile device is connecting to the
correct router/access point.
–For a Wi-Fi Direct connection, print a conguration page to determine the printer’s SSID.
If you are not sure that the SSID is correct, run the wireless setup again.
●With secured networks, verify that the security information is correct. If the security information is
incorrect, run the wireless setup again.
292 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
●If the wireless network is working correctly, try accessing other computers on the wireless network. If the
network has Internet access, try connecting to the Internet over a wireless connection.
●Verify that the encryption method (AES or TKIP) is the same for the printer as it is for the wireless access
point (on networks using WPA security).
●Verify that the printer is within the range of the wireless network. For most networks, the printer must be
within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point (wireless router).
●Verify that obstacles do not block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the access
point and the printer. Make sure poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete do not
separate the printer and wireless access point.
●Verify that the printer is located away from electronic devices that might interfere with the wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal including motors, cordless phones, security system
cameras, other wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices.
●For computers connecting to the wireless printer:
–Verify that the print driver is installed on the computer.
–Verify that you have selected the correct printer port.
–Verify that the computer and printer connect to the same wireless network.
–If your environment has multiple wireless signals and you need the printer to support dual band
networks on both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz, install the HP Jetdirect 2900nw print server accessory.
–For macOS, verify that the wireless router supports Bonjour.
The printer does not print after the wireless conguration completes
Resolve issues between your computer and the printer.
1. Make sure that the printer is turned on and in the ready state.
2. Turn o any third-party rewalls on your computer.
3. Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.
4. Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart the computer.
5. Verify that you can open the printer HP Embedded Web Server from a computer on the network.
The printer does not print, and the computer has a third-party rewall installed
Verify that a rewall is not interfering with wireless communication.
1. Update the rewall with the most recent update available from the manufacturer.
2. If programs request rewall access when you install the printer or try to print, make sure that you allow the
programs to run.
3. Temporarily turn o the rewall, and then install the wireless printer on the computer. Enable the rewall
when you have completed the wireless installation.
The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or printer
Verify that the printer and network settings are correct.
ENWW Solve wireless network problems 293
1. Make sure that the router or printer connects to the same network that your computer connects to.
2. Print a conguration page.
3. Compare the service set identier (SSID) on the conguration page to the SSID in the printer conguration
for the computer.
4. If the numbers are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network. Recongure the
wireless setup for the printer.
Cannot connect more computers to the wireless printer
Complete the following steps to solve connection issues.
1. Make sure that the other computers are within the wireless range and that no obstacles block the signal.
For most networks, the wireless range is within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point.
2. Make sure that the printer is turned on and in the ready state.
3. Make sure there are not more than 5 concurrent Wireless Print Direct users.
4. Turn o any third-party rewalls on your computer.
5. Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.
6. Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart the computer.
The wireless printer loses communication when connected to a VPN
Typically, you cannot connect to a VPN and other networks at the same time.
The network does not appear in the wireless networks list
Follow these steps when the network does not appear in the wireless network list on your computer.
●Make sure the wireless router is turned on and has power.
●The network might be hidden. However, you can still connect to a hidden network. Make sure the router/
access point is advertising the SSID by checking for its SSID in the available networks seen by your mobile
device.
The wireless network is not functioning
Complete the following steps to ensure that the network is functioning correctly.
1. For printers that do not support simultaneous wired and wireless connections, make sure that the network
cable is disconnected.
2. To verify if the network has lost communication, try connecting other devices to the network.
3. Test network communication by pinging the network.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer.
294 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
●For Windows, click Start, click Run, type cmd, and then press Enter.
●For macOS, go to Applications, then Utilities, and open Terminal.
b. Type ping followed by the router IP address.
c. If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
4. Make sure that the router or printer connects to the same network that the computer connects to.
a. Print a conguration page.
b. Compare the service set identier (SSID) on the conguration report to the SSID in the printer
conguration for the computer.
c. If the numbers are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network. Recongure
the wireless setup for the printer.
Reduce interference on a wireless network
The following tips can reduce interference in a wireless network:
●Keep the wireless devices away from large metal objects, such as ling cabinets, and other electromagnetic
devices, such as microwaves and cordless telephones. These objects can disrupt radio signals.
●Keep the wireless devices away from large masonry structures and other building structures. These objects
can absorb radio waves and lower signal strength.
●Position the wireless router in a central location in line of sight with the wireless printers on the network.
ENWW Solve wireless network problems 295
Checklist for solving fax problems
Use the following checklist to help identify the cause of any fax-related problems you encounter:
●What type of phone line are you using?
●Are you using a surge-protection device?
●Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine?
●Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature?
●Check fax accessory status
●Are you using the fax cable supplied with the fax accessory? This fax accessory has been tested with the
supplied fax cable to meet RJ11 and functional specications. Do not substitute another fax cable; the
analog-fax accessory requires an analog-fax cable. It also requires an analog phone connection.
●Is the fax/phone line connector seated in the outlet on the fax accessory? Make sure that the phone jack is
correctly seated in the outlet. Insert the connector into the outlet until it "clicks."
NOTE: Verify that the phone jack is connected to the fax port rather than to the network port. The ports
are similar.
●Is the phone wall jack working properly? Verify that a dial tone exists by attaching a phone to the wall jack.
Can you hear a dial tone, and can you make or receive a phone call?
What type of phone line are you using?
Verify the type of phone line you are using, and review the recommendations for that type of line.
●Dedicated line: A standard analog fax/phone line assigned to receive or send faxes.
NOTE: The phone line should be for printer fax use only and not shared with other types of telephone
devices. Examples include alarm systems that use the phone line for notications to a monitoring
company.
●PBX system: A business-environment phone system. Standard home phones and the fax accessory use an
analog phone signal. Some PBX systems are digital and might not be compatible with the fax accessory.
You might need an interfacing Analog Telephone Adapter (ATA) to connect the fax machine to digital PBX
systems.
●Roll-over lines: A phone system feature where a new call "rolls over" to the next available line when the rst
incoming line is busy. Try attaching the printer to the rst incoming phone line. The fax accessory answers
the phone after it rings the number of times set in the rings-to-answer setting.
Are you using a surge-protection device?
A surge-protection device can be used between the wall jack and the fax accessory to protect the fax accessory
against electrical power passed through the phone lines. These devices can cause some fax communication
problems by degrading the quality of the phone signal.
If you are having problems sending or receiving faxes and are using one of these devices, connect the printer
directly to the phone jack on the wall to determine whether the problem is with the surge-protection device.
ENWW Solve fax problems 297
Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine?
If the rings-to-answer setting for the messaging service is lower than the rings-to-answer setting for the fax
accessory, the messaging service answers the call, and the fax accessory cannot receive faxes.
If the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory is lower than that of the messaging service, the fax accessory
answers all calls.
Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature?
If the fax telephone line has an activated call-waiting feature, a call-waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in
progress, which causes a communication error.
Ensure that a call-waiting feature is not active on the fax telephone line.
Check fax accessory status
If the analog-fax accessory does not appear to be functioning, print a Conguration Page report to check the
status.
1. From the Home screen, scroll to and select Reports.
2. Open the following menus:
a. Conguration/Status Pages
b. Conguration Page
3. Touch the Print button to print the report, or touch the View button to view the report on the screen. The
report consists of several pages.
NOTE: The printer IP address or host name is listed on the Jetdirect Page.
4. On the Fax Accessory Page of the Conguration Page, under the Hardware Information heading, check the
Modem Status. The following table identies the status conditions and possible solutions.
NOTE: If the Fax Accessory Page does not print, there might be a problem with the analog fax accessory.
If you are using LAN fax or Internet fax, those congurations could be disabling the feature.
Table 9-15 Analog-fax accessory troubleshooting
Status conditions Possible solutions
Operational / Enabled1The analog-fax accessory is installed and ready.
Operational / Disabled1The fax accessory is installed, but you have not congured the
required fax settings yet.
The fax accessory is installed and operational; however, the
HP Digital Sending utility has either disabled the printer fax
feature or has enabled LAN fax. When LAN fax is enabled, the
analog-fax feature is disabled. Only one fax feature, either LAN
fax or analog fax, can be enabled at a time.
NOTE: If LAN fax is enabled, the Scan to Fax feature is
unavailable on the printer control panel.
Non-Operational / Enabled/Disabled1The printer has detected a rmware failure. Upgrade the
rmware.
298 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Table 9-15 Analog-fax accessory troubleshooting (continued)
Status conditions Possible solutions
Damaged / Enabled/Disabled1The fax accessory has failed. Reseat the fax accessory card and
check for bent pins. If the status is still DAMAGED, replace the
analog-fax accessory card.
1ENABLED indicates that the analog-fax accessory is enabled and turned on; DISABLED indicates that LAN fax is enabled (analog fax
is turned o).
ENWW Solve fax problems 299
General fax problems
Learn about solutions for common fax problems.
●The fax failed to send
●No fax address book button displays
●Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin
●The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled
●A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box
●A one-page fax prints as two pages
●A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing
●The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low
The fax failed to send
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
JBIG is enabled, and the receiving fax machine does not have JBIG capability.
Turn o the JBIG setting.
No fax address book button displays
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
None of the contacts in the selected contacts list have fax information associated with them. Add the necessary
fax information.
Not able to locate the Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are located under the device's status page drop-down menu.
Select Digital Sending and Fax from the drop-down menu.
The header is appended to the top of the page when the overlay option is enabled
This fax issue is a normal part of operation.
For all forwarded faxes, the printer appends the overlay header to the top of a page.
This is normal operation.
A mix of names and numbers is in the recipients box
This fax issue is a normal part of operation.
Names and numbers can both display, depending on where they are from. The fax address book lists names, and
all other databases list numbers.
This is normal operation.
300 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
A one-page fax prints as two pages
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
The fax header is being appended to the top of the fax, pushing text to a second page.
To print a one page fax on a single page, set the overlay header to overlay mode, or adjust the t-to-page
setting.
A document stops in the document feeder in the middle of faxing
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
A jam is in the document feeder.
Clear the jam, and send the fax again.
The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low
Verify the fax issue, and try the suggested solution.
The volume setting needs to be adjusted.
Adjust the volume in the Fax Send Settings menu and the Fax Receive Settings menu.
ENWW Solve fax problems 301
302 Chapter 9 Solve problems ENWW
Index
Symbols/Numerics
2 x 550-sheet paper tray and stand
part number 60
2 x 550-sheet trays
loading 42
2,700 high-capacity input paper tray
and stand
part number 60
2,700-sheet HCI paper trays
loading 49
550-sheet paper tray
part number 60
550-sheet trays
jams 213
loading 35
A
accessories
ordering 60
part numbers 60
acoustic specications 10, 17
AirPrint 99, 101
alternative letterhead mode 21, 28,
29, 34, 35, 41, 42, 48, 49, 54
Android devices
printing from 99, 102
B
bin, output
locating 4
Bonjour
identifying 178
browser requirements
HP Embedded Web Server 178
C
calibrate
colors 268
scanner 277
cartridge
dynamic security 63
order numbers 71
replacing 72
cartridge policy 64, 65
cartridge protection 64, 68
checklist
wireless connectivity 292
cleaning
glass 277, 282, 286
paper path 262
colors
calibrate 268
control panel
help 200
locating 4
locating features 7
copy
optimize for text or pictures 277
copy settings
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180, 182
copying
overview 107
customer self-repair parts 62
customer support
online 200
D
default gateway, setting 189
deleting
stored jobs 95, 98
digital send settings
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180, 182
digital sending
folders 160
printer memory 157
sending documents 154
USB 165
dimensions, printer 10, 14
DIMM
part number 60
document feeder
jams 215
paper-feeding problems 205,
212
double-sided printing
Mac 92
Windows 88
drivers, supported 10
duplex printing
Mac 92
duplex printing (double-sided)
settings (Windows) 88
Windows 88
duplexer
jams 213
duplexing
manually (Mac) 92
manually (Windows) 88
dynamic security
toner cartridge 63
E
easy-access USB printing 103
edge-to-edge copying 277
electrical specications 10, 17
Embedded Web Server
changing network settings 189
changing printer name 189
opening 189
Embedded Web Server (EWS)
assigning passwords 193, 194
features 178
network connection 178
energy use, optimizing 196
ENWW Index 303
envelopes
orientation 21, 22
envelopes, loading 55
Ethernet (RJ-45)
locating 6
Explorer, versions supported
HP Embedded Web Server 178
F
fax
feeding problems 296, 300
optimize for text or pictures 286
overview 169
required settings 170
settings 171
setup 170
fax port
locating 6
fax settings
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180, 183
required 170
feeding problems 296, 300
folders
sending to 160
foreign interface harness
part number 60
formatter
locating 5
fuser
jams 213
part number 61
G
gateway, setting default 189
general conguration
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180, 181
genuine HP cartridges 64, 65
glass, cleaning 277, 282, 286
H
hard disks
encrypted 193, 195
hard drive
part number 60
HCI. See high-capacity input paper
trays
Help button
locating 7
help, control panel 200
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port
locating 6
Home button
locating 7
HP Customer Care 200
HP Embedded Web Server
changing network settings 189
changing printer name 189
copy settings 178, 180, 182
digital send settings 178, 180,
182
fax settings 178, 180, 183
general conguration 178, 180,
181
HP Web Services 178, 180, 186
information pages 178, 180
network settings 178, 180, 186
opening 189
other links list 178, 180, 188
print settings 178, 180, 182
scan settings 178, 180, 182
security settings 178, 180, 185
supplies 184
troubleshooting tools 178, 180,
184
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
features 178
network connection 178
HP ePrint 99
HP ePrint software 99
HP JetAdvantage business solutions
167
HP Web Jetadmin 197
HP Web Services
enabling 178, 180, 186
I
image quality
check toner-cartridge status 262,
264
imaging drum
components 76
information 76
imaging drums
part number 60
replacing 77
information pages
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180
interface ports
locating 6
internal USB ports
part number 60
Internet Explorer, versions supported
HP Embedded Web Server 178
IP Security 193, 195
IPsec 193, 195
IPv4 address 189
IPv6 address 189
J
jams
2 x 550 paper trays 213
550-sheet trays 213
auto-navigation 213, 214
causes of 213, 214
document feeder 215
duplexer 213
fuser 213
high-capacity input paper trays
213
locations 213
output bin 213
right door 213
Tray 1 213
Tray 2 213
Jetadmin, HP Web 197
JetAdvantage 167
jobs, stored
creating (Windows) 95
deleting 95, 98
Mac settings 95
printing 95, 97
L
label, orientation 57
labels
printing (Windows) 88
printing on 57
labels, loading 57
LAN port
locating 6
left door
locating 5
loading
paper in the 2 x 550-sheet trays
42
paper in the 2,700-sheet HCI paper
trays 49
304 Index ENWW
paper in the 550-sheet trays 35
paper in Tray 1 21
paper in Tray 2 29
local area network (LAN)
locating 6
lock
formatter 193, 195
M
Mac driver settings
Job Storage 95
managing network 189
manual duplex
Mac 92
Windows 88
margins, small
copying 277
memory
included 10
memory chip (toner)
locating 71
minimum system requirements
macOS 12
Windows 12
mobile printing
Android devices 99, 102
mobile printing, software supported
10, 14
multiple pages per sheet
printing (Mac) 92
printing (Windows) 88
N
Near Field Communication printing
99, 100
Netscape Navigator, versions
supported
HP Embedded Web Server 178
network
printer name, changing 189
settings, changing 189
settings, viewing 189
network duplex settings, changing
189
Network Folder, scan to 160
network link speed settings,
changing 189
network settings
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180, 186
networks
default gateway 189
HP Web Jetadmin 197
IPv4 address 189
IPv6 address 189
subnet mask 189
supported 10
NFC accessory
part number 60
NFC connect and print 99, 100
O
on/o button
locating 4
online help, control panel 200
online support 200
operating systems, supported 10, 12
optimize copy images 277
optimize fax images 286
optimize scanned images 282
ordering
supplies and accessories 60
other links list
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180, 188
output bin
clear jams 213
locating 4
P
pages per minute 10
pages per sheet
selecting (Mac) 92
selecting (Windows) 88
paper
jams 213, 214
loading the 2 x 550-sheet trays
42
loading the 2,700-sheet HCI paper
trays 49
loading the 550-sheet trays 35
loading Tray 1 21
loading Tray 2 29
selecting 262, 266
Tray 1 orientation 21, 22
paper jams
2 x 550 paper trays 213
550-sheet trays 213
document feeder 215
duplexer 213
fuser 213
high-capacity input paper trays
213
locations 213
output bin 213
right door 213
Tray 1 213
Tray 2 213
paper pickup problems
solving 205, 208
paper trays
part numbers 60
paper type
selecting (Windows) 88
paper types
selecting (Mac) 92
paper, ordering 60
part number
toner-collection unit 81
part numbers
accessories 60
fuser 61
imaging drums 60
replacement parts 62
staple cartridge 60
supplies 60
toner cartridges 60
toner collection unit 60, 61
transfer kit 61
ports
locating 6
potential shock hazard 2
power
consumption 10, 17
power connection
locating 5
power switch
locating 4
power usage
1 watts or less 196
print drivers
Linux 12
macOS 12
UNIX 12
Windows 12
print drivers, supported 10
print media
loading in Tray 1 21
print on both sides
Mac 92
ENWW Index 305
manually, Windows 88
Windows 88
print settings
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180, 182
printer memory
sending to 157
printer memory, scan to 157
printing
from USB storage accessories
103
stored jobs 95, 97
printing on both sides
settings (Windows) 88
private printing 95
product number
locating 5
protect cartridges 64, 68
R
replacement parts
part numbers 62
replacing
imaging drums 77
staples 85
toner cartridges 72
toner-collection unit 81
required settings
fax 170
reset factory settings 201
right door
jams 213
RJ-45 port
locating 6
S
Save to printer memory 157
scan settings
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180, 182
Scan to Network Folder 160
initial setup 129
Scan to USB Drive 165
enabling 150
scanner
calibrate 277
glass cleaning 277, 282, 286
scanning
optimize for text or pictures 282
overview 113
scanning to email
sending documents 154
scanning to folder 160
scanning to printer folder 157
scanning to printer memory 157
scanning to USB 165
secuity settings
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180, 185
security
encrypted hard disk 193, 195
sending to email
sending documents 154
serial number
locating 5
settings
fax 171
reset to factory (default) settings
201
Sign In button
locating 7
Sign Out button
locating 7
sleep delay
setting 196
small margins 277
SODIMM
part number 60
special paper
printing (Windows) 88
specications
electrical and acoustic 10, 17
speed, optimizing 196
stand
part number 60
staple cartridge
part number 60
staples
replacing 85
status, fax accessory page 296, 297
storage, job
Mac settings 95
store print jobs 95
stored jobs
creating (Mac) 95
creating (Windows) 95
deleting 95, 98
printing 95, 97
storing jobs
with Windows 95
subnet mask 189
supplies
HP Embedded Web Server 184
low threshold settings 202
ordering 60
part numbers 60
replacing imaging drums 77
replacing staples 85
replacing toner cartridges 72
replacing toner-collection unit 81
using when low 202
support
online 200
supported operating systems 12
system requirements
HP Embedded Web Server 178
minimum 10
T
TCP/IP
manually conguring IPv4
parameters 189
manually conguring IPv6
parameters 189
technical support
online 200
toner cartridge
dynamic security 63
low threshold settings 202
using when low 202
toner cartridges
components 71
order numbers 71
part numbers 60
replacing 72
toner collection unit
part number 60, 61
toner-collection unit
information 81
part number 81
replacing 81
touchscreen
locating features 7
transfer kit
part number 61
transparencies
printing (Windows) 88
Tray 1
jams 213
306 Index ENWW
loading envelopes 55
paper orientation 21, 22
Tray 2
jams 213
loading 29
trays
capacity 10
included 10
locating 4
use alternative letterhead mode
28, 34, 41, 48, 54
troubleshooting
check toner-cartridge status 262,
264
jams 213, 214
network problems 290
paper feed problems 205
wired network 290
wireless network 292
troubleshooting tools
HP Embedded Web Server 178,
180, 184
two-sided printing
settings (Windows) 88
U
USB
sending to 165
USB port
enabling 103, 104, 106
locating 6
USB ports, optional
part number 60
USB storage accessories
printing from 103
W
web browser requirements
HP Embedded Web Server 178
websites
customer support 200
HP Web Jetadmin, downloading
197
weight, printer 10, 14
Wi-Fi direct bluetooth accessory
part number 60
Wi-Fi Direct Print 10, 14, 99, 100
wireless network
troubleshooting 292
wireless network interference 292,
295
wireless print server
part number 60
ENWW Index 307
308 Index ENWW